Home

EZD Series

1. Main menu PROGRAM DELETE PROGRAM CARD DEVICE CARD REPLACE CARO DEVICE DELETE CARD PROGRAM ETOP RUN J AEE PARAMETERS CARD DEWICE Pm REPLACE SET CLOCK DELETE CARD TERMINAL MODE DEVICE CARD CARD DEVICE PROGRAM Parameter display DELETE CARD gt DELETE STOF RUN lt PARAMETERS to Parameters SET CLOCK TERMINAL MODE PROGRAM Display for date and time setting STOP RUN PARAMETERS SET CLOCK ET CLOCK HH MM HH MM 14 23 TERMINAL MODE DST SETTING D H DD MH 03 10 YEAR ao YEAR 7004 SET CLOCK NOME J SUMMERTIME DST SETTING MANUAL DDO HM EU yf SUMMERTIME END GE D M us Only one selection is possible PROGRAM STOP RUH PARAMETERS SET CLOCK ni STATION ID 0 Connection TERMINAL MODE START MODE i af eee ate ee establishment in progress 22 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Main menu RUN f PARAMETERS SET CLOCK PASSWORD Unlocking EZD EZD operation Main menu with password protection Four wrong entries Password entry if enabled re or Password Correct Status display lt entry EZD system menu The System menu is accessed by simultaneously pressing DEL and ALT Password System menu SYSTEM NENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR Setup Password en
2. E T N Working with contacts and relays The operand is displayed ARIDI ACO SH C HgS gt 1 Actual value of counter C 01 Tz 10495 gt l2 Constant 1095 BUS HO 5b QV gt Marker double word MD56 gt P ress the ALT button again The display shows the values ARDI ACO I ODS he 1045 muy piini Coil functions You can set the coil function to determine the switching behavior of relay coils The following coil functions are assigned to all coils Table 10 Coil function EZD display Coil function Example Contactor function CR01 1002 0504 0 01 0M01 T Impulse relay function T0 H0S O08 J501 0i S Set S08 SH02 5009 5504 R Reset RGD4 RMOS ROO1 R503 Contactor function with negated result 3 0b M4b T Cycle pulse with rising edge PDA t Cycle pulse with falling edge TMy The function block descriptions state which coil functions can be used with the function block concerned MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 151 Programming wiring E T N Rules for wiring relay coils Relay with contactor function A coil should only be used once in order to retain an overview of the relay states However retentive coil functions such as 5 F can be used several times The following applies to non retentive coil functions such as T contactor negated contactor lr rising and falling edge detection Each coil must only be used o
3. Figure 187 EZ NET operation and COM LINK connections A COM LINK connection can be established with an EZ NET station The same conditions apply here as with operation without EZ NET Data accesses via COM LINK The following data access operations are possible from the active station to the remote station 350 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Active station read Introduction to COM LINK Remote station Inputs 1101 to 1116 101 to 116 Inputs of local 1R1 to 1R16 R01 to R16 expansion unit Outputs 1Q01 to 1908 Q01 to Q08 Outputs of local 1S01 to 1508 S01 to 08 expansion unit Diagnostics bits 1ID01 to 11D08 IDO1 to ID08 of EZ NET Analog inputs 1IA01 to 11A04 IA01 to IA04 Analog output 1QA01 QA01 Write read accesses in the marker range Active station Remote station 1 MD01 MD01 1 MW01 1MW02 MW01 MW02 1 MB01 1MB02 1MB03 1MB04 MBO1 MB02 MB03 MBO04 1 M01 to 1 M32 M01 to M32 1 MD02 MD02 1 MW03 1MW04 MW03 MW04 1 MB05 1MB06 1MB07 1MB08 MB05 MB06 MB07 MBO08 1 M33 to 1 M64 M33 to M64 1 MD03 MD03 1MW05 1 MW06 MW05 MW06 1 MB09 1MB10 1MB1l 1MB12 MB09 MB10 MB11 MB12 1M65 to 1 M96 M65 to M96 1 MD04 MD04 1 MW07 1 MW08 MW07 MW08 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 351 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N
4. 1 0 2 ig 38 75 30 gt a 38 75 4 5 gt a 16 25 75 16 25 29 5 5 e pss 107 5 gt Dimensions of the EZD R 1 0 module EZD T A 90 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 411 Appendix Climatic conditions General ambient conditions damp heat constant to IEC 60068 2 78 cyclical to IEC 600618 2 30 cold to IEC 60068 2 1 heat to IEC 60068 2 2 E T N Ambient temperature C F 25 to 55 13 to 131 Installed horizontally vertically Condensation power supply unit CPU Prevent condensation with inputs outputs Suitable measures Legibility of the display 10 to 0 C with activated C F 5 to 50 23 to 122 backlight uninterrupted duty Storage transport temperature C F 40 to 70 40 to 158 Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 5 to 95 non condensing Air pressure operation hPa 795 to 1080 Ambient mechanical conditions Pollution degree Power supply unit CPU inputs outputs 2 Display operating unit 3 Degree of protection EN 50178 IEC 60529 VBG4 Power supply unit CPU inputs outputs IP 20 Display operating unit IP65 Type 3R Type 12R Display operating unit with protective cover IP65 Type 3R Type 12R Display operating unit with protectiv
5. ta Eft Et Ee Ie t tsa s1 s1 s1 s1 s1 thy b2 t2 ty h bsta tsz la A B pe C Figure 142 Signal diagram of timing relay synchronous and asynchronous flashing 1 trigger coil T EN MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 269 Programming wiring E T N 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 Range A The relay flashes for as long as the Trigger coil is activated Range B The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time e Range C The Reset coil resets the relay Value limitation EZD provides 32 value limitation function blocks VC01 to VC32 The value limitation function block allows you to limit values You can define an upper and lower limit value The function block will then only output values within these limits Wiring of a value limitation function block You can integrate a value limitation function block into your circuit as a coil H4 E VERIEN Figure 143 EZD circuit diagram with VC value limitation Parameter display and parameter set for the VC function Mie H block seH c1 VC value limitation function block number 27 PSL Appears in the parameter display GM Mt Input value 5H Upper limit value PSL Lower limit value Gt Output value limited 270 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical c
6. E TeN EZD operation Contact Make contact Break contact Number Page Diagnostics inputs Expansion network station status 1 1 14 395 Station address 1 to 8 Network station short circuitfoverload 1 1 15 46 393 Station address 1 to 8 COM slave expansion unit status iI il 14 COM slave short circuitfoverload il il 15 16 Expansion status I i 14 395 Short circuit overload I i 15 46 393 Short circuit overload in expansion k F 15 48 393 network station Station address 1 to 8 Short circuitfoverload in COM slave iF iF 15 46 expansion short circuitfoverload with expansion F R 15 16 393 Outputs Deactivate backlight of the EZD LE LE li display Red LED of EZD display LE Jz 1 Green LED of EZD display LE ES 13 EZD output EZD network station 0 6 11 08 336 Station address 1 to 8 COM slave output ig i 11 08 EZD output 3 11 08 EZD output expansion with network 5 5 11 08 336 Station Station address 1 to 8 Output of COM slave expansion it 16 11 08 EZD output expansion B 5 11 08 Bit outputs via the network 54 5N 11 38 336 Station address 1 to 8 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 121 Programming wiring E T N Contact Make contact Break contact Number Page Other contacts Markers H H 1i 16 129 COM slave marker REMOTE iH 1H 11 46 351 MARKER J ump label Hi d2 237 Diagnostics
7. T IREN I j2 T DERE T NG leneessesana eae mara te it I 1j _ i T IST Figure 132 EZD circuit diagram with timing relay MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 257 Programming wiring E T N Parameter display and parameter set for timing relay Todi M S sI T D2 Timing relay function block number 02 he x On delayed mode GM M S Time range Minute Seconds Appears in the parameter display PIi Time setpoint value 1 Ie Time setpoint value 12 on a timing relay with 2 setpoint values GN Timed out actual time in RUN mode The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify the Switching function time base orsetpointtimes and enable the parameter display Timing relay modes Parameter Switch function x On delayed switching ox On delayed with random time range E Off delayed switching Off delayed with random time range xE On and off delayed o Off delayed with random time range setpoint retriggerable 0 Off delayed with random time range retriggerable 1E On and off delayed switching with random time 2 time setpoints I Single pulse switching ul Switch with flashing synchronous 2 time setpoint values ul Switch with flashing asynchronous 2 time setpoint values 258 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E
8. ceo CFI FE i 02 CF 11 ZE 1603 Figure 102 EZD circuit diagram with frequency counter Parameter display and parameter set for frequency counter CFOi Frequency counter function block number 01 Does not appear in the parameter display 5H Upper setpoint PSL Lower setpoint Qu Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change setpoint values and or the preset value and the enable of the parameter display Value range The function block operates in the integer range from 0 to 5000 1 kHz 1 1000 Behavior when value range is exceeded The value range cannot be exceeded as the maximum measured value is less than the value range Inputs The function block inputs H and SL can have the following operands 194 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs 1A01 to IA04 IA01 terminal 17 A02 terminal 18 A03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts e CFO1OF to CFO40F Actual value Upper set
9. BF it the top hat rail in the groove using the slide catch of the power supply CPU module and the expansion unit PTurn the top hat rail towards the housing gt Let the top hat rail snap into position Press the power supply CPU module onto the fixing shaft MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 39 Installation E TeN Tico Figure 17 Fitting the CPU with and without top hat rail 40 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Mounting the inputs outputs onto the power supply CPU module Figure 18 Plugging in the I O module The inputs outputs can be mounted before or after mounting the power supply CPU module onto the fixing shaft Figure 19 CPU with I O module MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 41 Installation E T N Removing the inputs outputs Figure 20 Releasing the 1 0 module Press the two catches together Pull one side out of the catch PP ull the other side out of the second catch Figure
10. E T N The first screen display is the selection of the marker range ME 00 gt ME DI C oo ec OD gt Selecta range CH 00 gt CH of PPress OK to access the Entry modes B 200 lt gt Selecta position from to Av Seta value Save the input from to with OK Press ESC to exit the input for the retentive ranges Up to six different ranges can be selected CI 00 gt CI Oo DE 00 gt DE 00 T M T OD BE 200 The display on the lower right 20 0 indicates the number of free bytes Example ME Di gt ME Y MB 01 to MB 04 C 12 to C 16 DB 01 to DB 16 T 26 to T 32 C dir C b should be retentive T a a E 124 bytes have been assigned to the retentive data range 76 bytes are still available DE 01 DE ib i T b T H EB 016 Deleting ranges Set the ranges to be erased to the values from 00 to 00 e g MEB 00 ME OD The markers are no longer retentive Deleting retentive actual values of markers and function blocks The retentive actual values are cleared if the following is fulfilled applies only in STOP mode 380 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Retention When the circuit diagram is transferred from E ZS oft PC or from the memory card to EZD the retentive actual values are reset to 0 This also applies when there is no program on the memory card In this case the old circuit diagram is retained in EZD When changing the respec
11. Contents About This Manual 9 Device designation 9 Writing conventions 9 EZD 11 Target readership 11 Proper use 11 Improper use 11 Overview 12 Device overview 14 EZD devices ata glance 14 Type references for the EZD 16 EZD operation 16 Buttons 16 Moving through menus and choosing values 17 Selecting main and system menu 18 EZD Status display 18 Status display for local expansion 19 EZD advanced Status display 19 EZD LED display 19 Menu structure 21 Selecting or toggling between menu items 27 Cursor display 28 Setting values 28 Installation 29 Mounting 29 Connecting the expansion unit 41 Terminals 47 Tool for cage clamp terminals 47 Connection cross sections of the E ZD cage clamp terminal cables 47 Tool for slot head screws for EZ expansion unit 47 Connection cross sections of screw terminal cables 47 Network cables and plugs 48 Connecting the power supply 48 Cable protection 52 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 1 E T N Connecting the inputs 53 Connecting the AC inputs 53 Connecting EZD DC inputs 58 Connecting the outputs 64 Connecting relay outputs 65 EZD R 65 EZ6 RE 66 EZ2 RE 66 Connecting transistor outputs 67 EZD T 67 EZ6 DC TE 67 Connecting analog outputs 69 Connecting servo valves 70 Setpoint entry for a drive 70 Connecting the NET network 71 Accessories 71 Cable length and cross sections 72
12. Use EZSoft to transfer circuit diagrams from your PC to EZD and vice versa Switch EZD to RUN mode from the PC to test the program using the current wiring EZS oft provides extensive help on how to use the software antag Start EZS oft and click on Help Index About EZSOFT The on line help provides all additional information about EZS oft that you will need If there are transmission problems EZD will display the INVALID PROG message gt Check whether you are using functions thatthe EZD device does not know gt If the operating voltage fails during communication with the PC repeat the last procedure It is possible that not all the data was transferred between the PC and EZD 404 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Loading and saving programs l Figure 198 Fitting and removing EZ800 P C CAB gt After transmission remove the cable and close the cover MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 405 Inside EZD E TeN Device version Every EZD CP8 has the device version number printed on the rear of the device housing The device version is indicated by the first two digits of the device number Example 01 10000003886 DC 20 4 28 8 V 3W This device is of device version 01 The device version provides useful service information about the hardware version and the version of
13. 118 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation Program A program is a sequence of commands which the EZD executes cyclically in RUN mode An EZD program consists of the necessary settings for the device EZ NET COM LINK password system settings a circuit diagram and or function blocks and or the visualization screens The circuit diagram is that part of the program where the contacts are connected together In RUN mode a coil is Switched on and off in accordance with the current flow and the coil function specified Function blocks Function blocks are program elements with special functions Example timing relays time switches arithmetic function blocks Function blocks are elements provided with or without contacts and coils as required In RUN mode the function blocks are processed according to the circuit diagram and the results are updated accordingly Examples Timing relay function block with contacts and coils Time switch function block with contacts Visualization screens Visualization screens are the sections of programs containing the display and operator functions Relays Relays are switching devices which are electronically simulated in EZD They actuate their contacts according to their designated function A relay consists of a coil and atleast one contact Contacts You modify the current flow with the contacts in the EZD circuit diagram Contacts su
14. MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 347 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Introduction to COM LINK The COM LINK is a point to point connection using the serial interface This interface connection allows the reading of input output states as well as the reading and writing of marker ranges This data can be used for setpoint entry or for display functions The stations of the COM LINK have different functions The active station controls the entire interface connection The remote station responds to the requests of the active station The remote station cannot distinguish whether the COM LINK is active or whether a PC with EZSoftis using the interface Only the EZD can be the active station ina COM LINK connection Remote stations can be EZD or EZ800 348 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Introduction to COM LINK Topology The following topologies are possible Two devices EZD as active station and EZ800 or EZD as remote station 200000006 00 Figure 186 COM LINK connection to an EZ800 or another EZD MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 349 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Establishing a COM LINK connection to an EZ NET station
15. la Comparison value 2 Inputs The function block inputs 11 and 1 can have the following operands Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs I1A01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Contacts CPOILT to CP32LT less than Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value on PI 1 is less than the value on I I1 lt I CPO1EQ to CP32EQ equal to Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value on 11 is equal to the value on I R I T e CPOQ1GT to CP32GT greater than MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 209 Programming wiring E T N Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value at 11 is greater than the value at 12 311 gt I Memory requirement of the counter relay The comparator function block requires 32 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Text output function block The EZD device provides 32 function blocks that operate in an EZ800 as text output function blocks These function blocks work in the EZD device as contacts and coils in the same way as in an EZ800 In the EZD device texts actual value output and setpoint entry are implemented using the appropriate visualization elements The text function block was adopted from the EZ800 so that the circuit
16. 44 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Hook the EZD to the top edge of the top hat rail and hinge into place while pressing down slightly Press down lightly on both the device and the top hat rail until the unit snaps over the lower edge of the top hat rail The EZD will clip into place automatically gt Check that the device is seated firmly The device is mounted vertically on a top hat rail in the same way Screw mounting For screw mounting on a mounting plate fixing brackets must be used that can be fixed to the back of the EZD The fixing brackets are available as an accessory The power supply CPU module can be screwed onto a mounting plate without the display operating unit Figure 25 Inserting a fixing bracket Three fixing brackets are sufficient for a device with four fixing points MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 45 Installation E T N OO uJ ld Figure 26 Screw mounting for the EZD EZ700 In a a Figure 27 Screw mounting for EZ 46 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the expansion unit Connecting the expansion unit Figure 28 Connecting expansion units Terminals Tool for cage clamp terminals Slot head s
17. In order to evaluate the count pulses of 3 kHz the high speed counter function blocks operate with an interrupt routine The length of the circuit diagram and the associated cycle time has no effect on the counter result Memory management of the EZD The EZD is provided with different memories The working memory or RAM size 8 KByte The RAM only stores the data when the device power Supply is active The screen memory size 24 KByte The screen memory stores the visualization data created with EZS oft retentively The program memory size 8 KByte The program memory stores the program retentively Distribution of data in the RAM When the power supply is switched on the RAM stores the program the retentive data and the screens to be displayed This has a direct effect on the size of the program and the screens The number of retentive data bytes reduces the memory available for program and screens The largest screen to be displayed likewise reduces the memory available for the program MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 389 Inside EZD E T N Only use as much retentive data as is actually required The screen with the largest memory requirement reduces the memory available for the program Several smaller screens allow more space for the program Use as small pictures as possible with 1 bit gray scale The pictures should normally be 32 x 32 pixels in size in order to fully uti
18. Ri iz AC expansion ok P buttons Expansion RS AC F or Weekday Date Weekday Time M 10 42 Outputs 1 E ETOF On 1 2 3 4 Off RS Expansion functioning correctly EZD advanced Status display 142 6 89 42 Retention debounce FE I NTI AC F __ AC expansion ok P buttons EZ NET station MO 1442 T Startup behavior G 12245b18 RUN Retention switched on Debounce switched on EZ NET station with station address The COM connection is active AC expansion functioning correctly DC expansion functioning correctly Bus coupling module detected GW flashes Only EZ200 EZ detected I O expansion not detected When the power supply is switched on EZD switches to STOP mode EZD LED display EZD features two LEDs on the back of the EZD CP power supply CPU device These indicate the status of the power supply POW and the RUN or STOP operating mode gt Fig 1 Page 14 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 19 EZD E T N Table 1 Power supply RUN STOP mode LED LED OFF No power supply LED continuously lit Power supply present STOP mode LED flashing Power supply present RUN mode Table 2 EZ NET LED EZ NET LED OFF EZ NET not operational fault in configuration LED continuously lit EZ NET is initialized and no station has been detected LED flashing EZ NET operating fault free The front of the EZD 80
19. aS Station 1 must always have a circuit diagram Possible write and read authorization in the network The stations have differing read and write authorization in the EZ NET network according to their functions and configuration Station 1 Authorized read access to all inputs and outputs of all stations regardless of the function Observe the setting of SEND 10 Section Send each change on the inputs outputs SEND 10 Page 341 Authorized write access to the station s own local outputs Authorized write access to the physical digital outputs of the Stations which are functioning as input output devices Write authorization to the network bit data 2 to 8 SN 1 to 32 Stations 2 to 8 Input output device function No read and write authorization Intelligent station function Authorized read access to all inputs and outputs of all stations regardless of the function Observe the setting of SEND 10 gt Section Send each change on the inputs outputs SEND 10 Page 341 Write authorization to its own local outputs Write authorization to the network bit data SN 1 to 32 338 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the EZ NET network Configuration ofthe EZ NET EZ NET can be configured so thatit can be optimized for your network application Station number The station number is identified as the EZ NET ID in the device The station number can
20. single pulse flashing 0 status for off delayed Function of the timing relay function block Timing relay on delayed with and without random switching Random switching The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the setpoint value range MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 261 Programming wiring E T N i I N Figure 133 Signal diagram of timing relay on delayed with and without random switching 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 t setpoint time Range A The set time elapses normally Range B The entered setpointdoes notelapse normally because the trigger coil drops out prematurely e Range C The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing 262 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Figure 134 Signal diagram of timing relay on delayed with and without random switching Range D The Stop coil is inoperative after the time has elapsed Range E The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact Range F The Reset coil resets the time during the timeout After the Reset coil drops out the time elapses normally Timing relay off delayed with and without random switching Random switching with and without retriggering The contact of the timing relay rand
21. E TeN EZD Series User Manual April 2005 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com Eaton Safety instructions E T N Warning Dangerous electrical voltage Before commencing the installation Disconnect the power supply of the device Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally restarted Verify isolation from the supply Short circuit to earth Cover or enclose neighboring units that are live Follow the engineering instructions AWA of the device concerned Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with EN 50110 1 2 VDE 0105 Part 100 may work on this device system Before installation and before touching the device ensure that you are free of electrostatic charge The functional earth FE must be connected to the protective earth PE or to the potential equalization The system installer is responsible for implementing this connection Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so that inductive or capacitive interference does notimpair the automation functions Install automation devices and related operating elements in such a way that they are well protected against unintentional operation Suitable safety hardware and software measures should be implemented for the l O interface so thata line or wire breakage on the signal side does not result in undefined states in the automation devices Ensure a reliable electrica
22. Input value gt I1 11gec BCD binary value 00010001 Hexadecimal value 00010001 Decimal value QV gt 17 1 16 Hexadecimal value Bit 0 has the value 1 Bit 4 has the value 16 Total Bit 0 plus Bit 4 17 Example 3 Input value gt I1 19qec BCD binary value 00011001 Hexadecimal value 00011001 Decimal value QV gt 25 1 8 16 Example 4 Input value gt I1 9999999 qe BCD binary value 1001100110011001100110011001 Hexadecimal value 10011001 10011001100110011001 Decimal value QV gt 161061273 Example 5 Input value gt I1 61673dec BCD binary value 10000000000001100001011001110011 Hexadecimal value 1000 0000000001100001011001110011 Decimal value QV gt 398 963 Bit 32 is the sign bit Bit32 1 gt Sign Minus Example 6 Input value gt l1 2147483 647 dec BCD binary value 01111111111111111111111111111111 246 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N OTO4 I BM Function blocks Hexadecimal value 01111111111111111111111111111111 Decimal value QV gt 161061273 Values greater than 9999999 are output as 161061273 Values less than 9 999999 are output as 161061273 The working range of the function block has been exceeded Operating hours counter EZD provides 4 independent operating hours counters The counter states are retained even when the device is switched off As long as the enable coil of the operating hours
23. STATION ID D START MODE STATION ID 1 J START MODE STATION ID g START MODE Connection establishment in progress Terminal mode Select the second station This station will control the display and respond to the operating unit Station ID 0 Station on the serial interface 1 Station 1 EZ NET 2 Station 2 EZ NET 3 Station 3 EZ NET 4 Station 4 EZ NET 5 Station 5 EZ NET 6 Station 6 EZ NET 7 Station 7 EZ NET 8 Station 8 EZ NET BP ress the OK button Select your station Press the or v button gt P ress the OK button Select the START MODE menu option Press the v button gt P ress the OK button In this case the EZ NET station 2 is connected The EZD tries to establish connection to the selected device The text flashes Once the connection is established the menu appears or the Status display in which the selected device is active MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 113 Commissioning The remote device is in Graphic mode Ti 4 789 I HT F TU 06 05 2003 Z 1 45618 RUN A E T N If the text Connection establishment in progress is displayed for longer than 10 s the connection to the selected device is faulty Press ESC to cancel the selection Rectify the fault Try to re establish the connection The following applies if the device to be op
24. Screen 1 The first screen contains a message text element with six message texts Status value 1 Message text These Status value 2 Message text are six Status value 3 Message text message texts Status value 4 Message text in one Status value 5 Message text message text e Status value 6 Message text element Itcan be seen that the messages can be moved within the entry field MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 329 Visualization with EZD Screen 2 E T N Screen 2 is almost the same as screen 1 apart from one addition which enables the message text element to be made invisible via 11 make contact bit logic The use of the break contact bit logic would make the element visible Message texts 1 not actuated 1 actuated Invisible via Invisible via I1 I1 Figure 180 Make message text invisible Screen 3 Screen 3 is almost the same as screen 1 apart from one addition by which the actuation of 11 causes the first message text element to flash and the second message text element to be inverted Display change via I1 Message texts Message texts Display change via I1 Figure 181 Making message text flash or inverted 330 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Button editor All buttons of the EZD can be assigned i
25. 2 not actuated 2 actuated flashing flashing via I2 via I2 02 ON 02 OFF Figure 175 Message text flashing Screen 6 Screen 6 is basically the same as screen 5 except that Inverted was selected for the Display change function When input 12 1 make contact bit logic the message text in this screen can thus be inverted 2 not actuated 12 actuated invert invert via I2 via I2 oz on A Figure 176 Message text inverted Screen 7 Screen 7 is basically the same as screen 6 except that the inverted display is controlled by timing relay T07 asynchronous clock pulse The text flashes in the display at different pulse and pause times flashing flashing via timer via timer Q2 ON 02 ON Figure 177 Message text inverted flashing MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 323 Visualization with EZD E T N Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine E UNB RESTART Example program 2 activating message texts with a timing relay The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The screen ac
26. 32767 Example Value at input Value processed in the function block TG Recovery time Tg 250 25s KF Proportional gain Kp 1500 15 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil FTOLEN to FT32EN function block enable Memory requirement of the FT function block The FT function block requires 56 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the signal smoothing filter function block mS The signal smoothing filter must be enabled so that it can work Coil FT EN is active If coil FT EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 221 Programming wiring E T N If the function block is called for the first time the output value is initialized with the input value when the device is started or after a reset This speeds up the startup behavior of the function block The function block updates the output value every time recovery time Tg expires The function block operates according to the following equation Y t TalTg x Kp x x t Y t1 Y t Calculated output value for scan time t Ta Scan time Tg Recovery time Kp Proportional gain x t Actual value with scan time t Y t1 Output value with scan time t 1 Scan time Scan time Ta depends on the set recovery time value Recovery time Tg Scan time Ta
27. Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 7 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 243 Programming wiring E T N Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Coil NCO1EN to NC32EN enable coil Memory requirement of the numerical converter The numerical converter function block requires 32 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the numerical converter function block The numerical converter function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil NC EN is active If coil NC EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero BCD mode The BCD value at 4 is provided in decimal format at the input The binary value is formed from this The binary value is interpreted as a BCD value Values greater than 9 1001 are set to the value 9 The BCD value is output as a decimal value at the output QV gt Example 1 Input value gt I1 9qec Binary value 1001 Decimal value QV gt 9 Example 2 Input value gt l1 14qec Binary value 1110 Decim
28. For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 365 EZD Settings TIHA Ii O20 030 I3 005 000 gy O12 050 E T N gt Select the required function block with or v Press the OK button Scroll with the or v cursor buttons through the constants of the function block inputs Change the values for a parameter set With OK in the Entry mode lt gt change decimal place Ay change the value of a decimal place OK save constants or ESC Retain previous setting Press ESC to leave the parameter display Only constants on the function block inputs can be changed Adjustable parameters for function blocks You can modify the function blocks used in the circuit diagram in three different ways All circuit diagram parameters can be adjusted in STOP mode via the function block editor Setpoints constants can be modified in RUN mode via the function block editor Setpoints constants can be modified via the PARAMETERS menu Adjustable setpoint values are e The inputs with all function blocks if constants have been used e Switch on and off times with time switches In RUN mode EZD operates with a new setpoint as soon as it has been modified in the parameter display and saved with OK 366 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Setting date time and daylight saving time Setting date time and daylight saving time DS
29. Plugging and unplugging network cables 74 Connecting the serial interface 76 Expanding inputs outputs 79 Local expansion 79 Remote expansion 81 3 Commissioning 83 Switching on 83 Setting the menu language 83 EZD operating modes 84 Creating your first circuit diagram 85 Starting point Status display 87 Circuit diagram display 88 From the first contact to the output coil 89 Wiring 90 Testing the circuit diagram 92 Deleting the circuit diagram 95 Fast circuit diagram entry 95 Configuring an EZ NET network 96 Entering the network station number 97 Entering network stations 98 Configuring an EZ NET network 99 Changing the EZ NET network configuration 100 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Displaying the Status display of other stations 101 Configuring the interface for the COM LINK mode 102 Setting up the COM LINK 103 Terminal mode 107 Terminal mode 107 4 Programming wiring diagrams with EZD 117 EZD operation 117 Buttons for drawing circuit diagrams and function block usage 117 Operating principles 118 Usable relays and function blocks coils 126 Markers analog operands 129 Number formats 133 Circuit diagram display 133 Saving and loading programs 135 Working with contacts and relays 136 Creating and modifying connections 139 Inserting and deleting a rung 141 Saving circuit diagrams 142 Aborting circuit diagram entry 142 Searc
30. Short circuit and ground Cover adjacent live parts The EZD is installed in the following order Mounting e Wiring up the inputs Wiring up the outputs e Wiring up the NET network if required Setting up the serial interface if required Connecting the power supply Mounting Install the display operating unit of the EZD in the front of a control cabinet a service distribution board operator panel or in an enclosure Install the power supply CPU module and the input output module so that all the terminals are protected against direct contact liquids and dust during operation When using the EZD without a display operating unit snap it onto a IEC EN 60715 top hat rail or fix it in place using fixing brackets The EZD can be mounted either vertically or horizontally MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 29 Installation E TeN When using the EZD with expansion units connect the expansion concerned before mounting see page 47 _ For ease of wiring leave a gap of atleast 30 mm between the EZD terminals and the wall or adjacent devices 30 at yho Figure 4 Clearances to the EZD Fitting the protective membrane For special applications such as in the food industry the operating unit must be protected against the ingress of dust liquids etc For this use the specially designed protective membrane Fitthe protecti
31. Station address Coil name Coil number Working with contacts and relays A contact of a function relay is assigned the name of the function block the number and the contact function Example contact of comparator function block If the contact on a network station is used the address of the Station is placed before the contact name Example contact of an EZ NET station Coils With a relay coil or function block select the coil function coil or function block name coil or function block number as well as coil of the function block With coils of an EZ NET network Station the network address is selected before the coil name Example relay coil output Relay coil for timing relay function block with control coil Relay coil of an EZ NET station A full list of all the contacts and relays is given in the overview starting on Page 120 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 137 Programming wiring E T N Values for contacts and coil fields are changed in Entry mode The value to be changed flashes EZD proposes the contact I 21 or the coilT amp 01 when starting entries in an empty field gt Move the cursor using the buttons lt gt to a contact or coil field Press OK to switch to Entry mode PUse lt I to select the position you wish to change or press OK to jump to the next position gt Use to modify the value at the position EZD will leave Entry mod
32. The actual time t is cleared and the set time ts elapses completely retriggerable switch function Timing relay on delayed and off delayed with and without random switching Time value gt 11 On delayed time Time value gt I2 Off delayed time Random switching The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the setpoint value range MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 265 Programming wiring E T N Figure 137 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 1 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 t1 pick up time t2 drop out time Range A The relay processes the two times without any interruption Range B The trigger coil drops out before the on delay is reached Range C The Stop coil stops the timeout of the on delay Range D The stop coil has no effect in this range 266 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Figure 138 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 2 Range E The Stop coil stops the timeout of the off delay Range F The Reset coil resets the relay after the on delay has elapsed Range G The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact while the on delay is timing out After the Reset coil drops out the time ela
33. Value entry 311 Message text 318 Button editor 331 Selectan operable screen element 331 Display backlight 331 Screen change 331 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Password logout 332 Set variable to fixed value 332 Increment variable 332 Decrement variable 332 Changeover relay 332 6 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial Connection 333 Introduction to EZ NET 333 EZ NET network topologies addressing and functions 334 Loop through the unit wiring method 334 T connector and spur line 334 Position and addressing of the operands via EZ NET 336 Possible write and read authorization in the network 338 Configuration of the EZ NET network 339 Station number 339 Transmission speed 339 Pause time changing the write repetition rate manually 340 Automatic change of the RUN andSTOP mode 341 Input output device REMOTE 10 configuration 342 Station message types 343 Transfer behavior 343 Signs of life of the individual stations and diagnostics 344 Introduction to COM LINK 348 Topology 350 Configuration of the COM LINK 352 7 EZD Settings 357 Password protection 357 Password setup 358 Selecting the scope of the password 359 Activating the password 360 Unlocking EZD 361 Changing the menu language 364 Changing parameters 365 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 E T N Adjustable parameters for function blocks 36
34. Visualization with EZD E T N Message text This mask elementcan be used to display texts thatare stored beforehand in a text table inside the program A textcan have a maximum length of 16 characters Additional blanks are added to the displayed text if itis shorter than the element A message text is used for indicating status changes in the process In order to visually indicate changes of this kind you can link message texts with a variable associated variable When the variable concerned assumes a specified value the EZD outputs the appropriate message text The default textis output if the variable assumes a value thatis not assigned to a text Programming in EZSoft gt Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Message text screen element into the screen gt Position the mouse above the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Two sizes are available Normal font size and Double font size You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle atthe bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as required by dragging the selection handle on the sides Ensure that the scre
35. a Figure 75 Terminal mode using the point to point serial interface 108 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Terminal mode Terminal mode using the EZ NET topology Figure 76 Terminal mode using the EZ NET topology In the above topology the physical location is not identical to the station number The EZD device was connected in the middle of the network line Terminal mode functions irrespective of the device location and station number MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 109 Commissioning E T N Figure 77 Terminal mode in EZ NET with two EZD devices The above topology allows two EZD devices to be run in EZ NET Terminal mode Each EZD device can run with the other devices in Terminal mode 110 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Terminal mode Oud 6 erminal mode in EZ NET as well as via two Serial interfaces The a
36. device has a green LED and a red LED These can be used in your visualization application as light indicators The following applies to Terminal mode Green LED Table 3 Power supply RUN STOP mode LED LED OFF No power supply LED continuously lit Power supply present STOP mode LED flashing Power supply present RUN mode Red LED Table 4 Fault on the EZ NET LED OFF Operation correct LED continuously lit EZ NET remote device faulty 20 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN EZD operation Menu structure Main menu without password protection PY ou access the main menu by pressing OK STOP Circuit diagram display Main menu RUN Power flow display PROGRAM gt PROGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM HH O STOP RUN DELETE PROGRAM FUNCTION RELAYS Circuit diagram PARAMETERS CARD SET CLOCK TERMINAL MODE Parameter display Parameters CIRCUIT DIAGRAM f FUNCTION RELAYS Function block editor Parameters CANCEL SEARCH 60 T PROGRAM DELETE PROGRAM DELETE CARD MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 21 EZD E T N
37. terminal 8 1403 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 An arithmetic function block is not wired in the circuit diagram Parameter display and parameter set for arithmetic function blocks ARIZ Arithmetic function block number 32 ADD Addition mode Appears in the parameter display I First value ti Second value GW Result of the addition Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block 162 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Arithmetic function block modes Parameter Function ADD Addition of summand value 11 plus summand 312 SUB Subtraction of minuend 11 minus subtrahend I MUL Multiplication of factor 11 by factor I2 DIY Division of dividend 14 by divisor 18 Value range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147 483647 Behavior when value range is exceeded The function block sets the switching contact AR CY to Status 1 The function block retains the value of the last valid operation The value is zero when itis first called Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Con
38. via the Boolean operand 11 If I1 is actuated the Bitmap flashes Figure 155 Flashing bitmap 296 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Background covered Res Background transparent Screen overview Screen 3 Screen 3 contains three bitmaps that are arranged in different sizes next to each other Screen 4 Screen 4 contains two bitmaps that are arranged in different sizes next to each other The Invert Bitmap Display check box activates the inverted display Screen 5 Screen 5 contains one bitmap The Visibility tab controls the bitmap 1 is used to make the bitmap invisible Invisible Invisible via via Ii I1 Figure 156 Switch invisible function Screen 6 Screen 6 contains only one bitmap The Invert Bitmap Display check box is activated in the Display tab In the Visibility tab the associated variable 2 is defined for switching visibility break contact bit logic When 12 is actuated the bitmap is inverted as shown below Screen 7 Screen 7 contains two bitmaps Background covered is selected in the Display tab for both bitmaps However as the right bitmap covers the left one the right bitmap is displayed completely Screen 8 Screen 8 contains two bitmaps The right one covers the left one Both bitmaps are displayed fully since the background of the right bitmap is set for tran
39. x OOF RED 186 Counter function block lower setpoint value undershot Fall below C x FE run K FB RED 186 Counter function block actual value equal to zero C X ZE C X ZE RED 186 Counter function block actual value has exceeded counter range CARRY Ca cy mie x CY REO 186 Frequency counter f u nction block upper setpoint value exceeded Overflow CF x OF CF x OF RED 14 193 Frequency counter lower setpoint v Fall f u below nction block alue undershot CF x FE a rat x m REO 14 193 Frequency counter f u actual value equal to zero nction block CF x ZE a 4 aa F4 m RED 14 193 High upper setpoint value Overflow f speed counter unction exceeded block CH x OF a i aa ma a RE 4 197 High lower setpoint value Fall f speed counter below un unction dershot block CH X FE a i 7 m RED 14 197 High actu f speed counter al value equal to unction zero block CH x ZE a i mH F4 m RED 4 197 High f speed counter range CARRY unction actual value has exceeded counter block CH x CY a T nm me RED 4 197 MN05013005E For more information
40. 0 1stols 10 ms 1s to 6553s Tg x 0 01 GET fetch a value from the network The function block allows you to selectively read get a 32 bit value from the network The GET function block fetches data which another station has made available on the EZ NET network with a PUT function block GTI 1 amp 1 I DEIET Figure 114 EZD circuit diagram with GET function block 222 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N GTOi lr 20 BM Function blocks Parameter display and parameter set for the GET function block Tli GET function block fetch a value from the network number 01 De Station number from which the value is sent Possible Station number 01 to 08 20 Send function block PT 20 of the sending station Possible function block number 01 to 32 Appears in the parameter display ay Actual value from the network Output The function block output can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Contacts GT01Q1 to GT32Q1 Contact make contact GT Q1 switches to status 1 if a new value transferred on the EZ NET network is present Memory requirement of the GET function block The GET function block requires 28 bytes of memory GET diagnostics The GET function block only functions when the EZ NET network is functioning correctly gt Section Signs of life of the
41. 14 11 F1 x value la Comparison value 2 Fi Gain factor for 12 12 FE x value r05 Offset for the value of 11 HY Switching hysteresis for value 12 Value H applies to positive and negative hysteresis Inputs The function block inputs 11 2F1 12 F 05 and H can have the following operands e Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs 1A01 to IA04 JA01 terminal 17 1402 terminal 18 A03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 159 Programming wiring E T N Analog value comparator operating modes Parameter Function GT 11 greater than rIe E I1 equal to 12 LT 11 less than I Contacts A 01Q1 to A 32Q1 Memory requirement of the analog value comparator The analog value comparator function block requires 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Figure 97 Signal diagram of the analog value comparator 1 actual value on I1 2 setpoint value on 12 3 hysteresis on H 4 switching contact make contact 5 offset for value 11 160 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks 6 actual value plus offset e Range A Compare 11 gt 12 The actual value 11 increases The contact switches when the actual reaches
42. 15 Numerical value analog value output with invisibility activated Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 1 range 0 to 10 two decimal places Unit of measure V Volt make number invisible via Boolean operand 11 make contact bit logic Visibility tab Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 2 range 5 to 5 two decimal places Unit of measure V Volt make number invisible via Boolean operand 12 make contact bit logic Visibility tab Invisibility via I1 via I2 1 29V Figure 164 Make invisible function MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 307 Visualization with EZD Screen 6 E T N Screen 6 shows a simple example of the display change using an external trigger In this example input 11 is the external trigger The screen contains two numerical values These are associated with the output QV of timing relay T08 which is a DWord type variable The timing relay is run in a loop from 0 to 10 seconds Table 16 Numerical value analog value output with display change via external trigger input General settings Value range from 0 to 11000 unit of measure s seconds scaling range from 0 to 11 two decimal places display change active detection via external trigger input Left numerical value Display of timing relay value T08 11 actuated the numerical value flashes as the external trigger is se
43. 21 Removing the I O module Remove the I O module 42 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Removing the power supply CPU module The power supply CPU module can be removed with or without the I O module If there is another fixing point for the top hat rail apart from the one for the display operating unit undo it Figure 22 Releasing the fixing shaft Use a screwdriver with a 100 x 3 5 mm slot width gt Insert the screwdriver into the lug of the fixing shaft catch Lever out the slide catch Pull out the power supply CPU module from the fixing Shafts Mounting on top hat rail The power supply CPU module can be mounted on a top hat rail without the display operating unit The fastening catches must be removed in order to mount the device on a fastened top hat rail MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 43 Installation E TeN Figure 23 Removing the spring Remove the spring with a screwdriver Figure 24 Pulling out and removing the slide catch gt Pull the slide catch out of the guide and remove it
44. ARTI ACD T if tx Li TH x Mea tli gigi Ig QY T4542 EN ARTI ACD CFil T if tx L Oi RUN ARTI ACD I1 20056 rI 1015 OMe 21154 E T N The function block is deleted Checking function blocks You can check function blocks in the same way as circuit diagrams The device is in RUN mode Checking from the circuit diagram Position the cursor on a contact or a coil of the required function block Press OK The function block will be displayed in this case a timing relay gt l1 set time of the timing relay QV gt the actual value is 14 minutes 42 seconds The enable coil is actuated EN is visible If a coil of a function block is actuated in RUN mode the coil name with the coil designation will appear on the display Checking the function block via the function block editor You access the function block list via the FUNCTION RELAYS menu Select the required function block In this case the arithmetic function block ARO1 in the Adder mode Press the OK button The function block is presented with the actual values and the result Displaying the operands when checking the function blocks If you want to know which operands are used on the function block inputs and outputs when checking the function block press the ALT button on the displayed value 150 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E
45. DEL again it will delete the horizontal connection as well You cannot delete connections that EZD has created automatically Close the delete operation with ALT or by moving the cursor to a contact or coil field Inserting and deleting a rung The EZD circuit diagram display shows three of the 256 rungs on the display at the same time EZD automatically scrolls up or down the display to show hidden rungs even empty ones if you move the cursor past the top or bottom of the display A new rung is added below the last connection or inserted above the cursor position gt Position the cursor on the first contact field of a rung gt Press ALT The existing rung with allits additional connections is shifted downwards The cursor is then positioned directly in the new rung fa Figure 82 Inserting a new rung MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 141 Programming wiring I li 1 12 D1 H o1 at SAVE 4 T Wiser pe D Hvoi ad CANCEL I I 1 pa H Hy iig SEARCH ee ae H H gi SEARCH Iii E T N Saving circuit diagrams Press the ESC button to save a circuit diagram The menu on the left appears in the status line Press OK to save the entire program circuit diagram and function blocks After saving you will be in the CIRCUIT DIAGRAM menu Aborting circuit diagram entry
46. EatonElectrical com 399 Inside EZD E TeN Information stored on the memory card is non volatile and thus you can use the card to archive transfer and copy your circuit diagram On the memory card you can save the program all the visualization data of the screens all parameter settings of the circuit diagram the system settings debounce setting P buttons password retention on off and range EZ NET configuration setting for automatic startup in Terminal mode COM LINK settings DST settings Card mode gt Insert the memory card in the open interface slot 400 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E 1 N Loading and saving programs Figure 197 Fitting and removing the memory card _ With EZD you can insertand remove the memory card even if the power supply is switched on without the risk of losing data Loading or saving circuit diagrams You can only transfer circuit diagrams in STOP mode The EZD versions without a keypad and display automatically transfer the circuit diagram from the inserted memory card to the EZD CP8 when the power supply is switched on If the memory card contains an invalid circuit diagram EZD will keep the circuit diagram still present on the device MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 401 Inside EZD gt FROGRAM DELETE PROG CARD
47. Figure 29 AC power supply on the EZD Attention A short current surge will be produced when switching on for the first time Do not switch on AC via Reed contacts since these may burn or melt MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 49 Installation E TeN EZ AC E expansion units L N F1 i QO O SOSS E E R1 i Ri2 L N N 115 230 V Figure 30 Power supply on the AC expansion units Attention A short current surge will be produced when switching on for the firsttime Do not switch on EZ AC via Reed contacts since these may burn or melt 50 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the power supply EZD DC power supply LO1 LO2 L01 ajal 24V OV OV Figure 31 Power supply on the EZD The EZD power supply CPU module supplies the necessary power supply to itself the display the input output electronics the EZ LINK and optionally the EZ NET The EZD device power supply CPU module is protected against reverse polarity Ensure the correct polarity of the terminals to ensure that the EZD functions correctly MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 51 Installation ETN EZ DC E DC expansion units LO1 L01 F1 Ip QO O SOSS E E Rl oon R12 24V OV OV 24V Figure 32 Power supply on the DC expansion units EZ
48. I li 1 b ca 0 I b SM 1k H b i Figure 193 Output of operating state MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 393 E T N Inside EZD The above circuit operates as described in example 1 The Signal light is triggered at Q4 for additional overload monitoring If Q4 has an overload it would pulse Example 3 Automatic reset of error signal Figure 194 Automatic reset of error signal The above circuit diagram functions in the same way as Example 2 In addition the marker M16 is reset every 60 seconds by timing relay T08 on delayed 60 s Should 116 remain at 1 M16 will continue to be set Q1 is set briefly to 1 until 116 switches off again 394 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Expanding EZD Expanding EZD You can expand EZD with EZ models EZ618 RE EZ620 D TE EZ202 RE locally or use the EZ200 EZ coupling module for remote expansion with EZ600 expansion All available bus interface devices such as EZ204 DP EZ221 CO EZ205 ASI or EZ222 DN can be used if present Install the units and connect the inputs and outputs as described see Section Connecting the expansion unit Page 47 You process the inputs of the expansion devices as contacts in the EZD circuit diagram in the same way as you process the inputs of the basic unit
49. LANGUAGE FRANCAIS CONFIGURATOR ESPANOL Only one selection is possible ITALIANG PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS SVENSKA POLSKI TURKCE SECURITY HET NET PARAMETERS SYSTEM con STATIONS MENU LANGUAGE LINK CONFIGURE CONFIGURATOR gt The other menus of NET and COM are only shown in STOP mode HET FARAHETERS HET ID STATIONS BRUDRATE KE CONFIGURE BUSDELAY SEND I REMOTE RUN REMOTE 10 NET ID Di BAUDRATE iDD0KE BUSDELAY 08 SEND TO I REMOTE RUN 7 REMOTE I0 y MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 25 EZD System menu E T N This list is only created NET FARAMETERS 1 1 STATIONS z 1 in Station 1 CONFIGURATOR 7 l This list only appears if 4 0 E station 1 has been 5 1 lect od selected 1 1 E 1 y SAVE CANCEL NET PARAMETERS STATIONS c CONFIGURE c CONFIGURATION IH PROGRESS Fault scenario with ID conflict Fault scenario with network fault ERR ID CONFLICT CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION ERR TIME OUT 26 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation System menu MET BAUDRATE 16006 gt BAUDRATE 152006 COM COM LINK COM LINK i CONFIGURE REMOTE MARKER
50. N Other inductive loads Technical data To 95 15 ms Utilization factor g 0 25 R 480 z F L 0 24H Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency Switch 1500 f 0 5 Hz operations h Max duty factor DF 50 Inductive loading with external suppressor circuit for each load Section Connecting transistor outputs Page 67 Utilization factor g 1 Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency Switch Depends on the Max duty factor operations h suppressor circuit Analog output EZD RA17 EZD TA17 Number 1 Electrical isolation To power supply No To the digital inputs No To the digital outputs Yes To the EZ NET network Yes Output type DC voltage Signal range VDC 0 to 10 Output current max 10 Load resistor kQ 1 Short circuit and overload proof Yes MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 425 Appendix EF T N EZD RA17 EZD TA17 Resolution analog VDC 0 01 Resolution digital Bit 10 Value 0 to 1023 Transient recovery time Us 100 Accuracy 25 to 55 C related to the range 2 Accuracy 25 C related to the range 1 Conversion time Each CPU cycle EZ NET network EZD CP8 NT Number of stations 8 Bus length transmission speed m Kbaud 6 1000 25 500 40 250 125 125 300 50 700 20 1000 10 Electrical isolation Yes To power supply inputs outputs EZ LINK PC interface memory
51. PC interface memory card EZ NET network EZ LINK Yes Rated voltage Rated value VDC 24 0 signal 11 to 16 and 19 to 110 VDC lt 5 17 18 111 112 VDC lt 8 On 1 signal 11 to 16 and 19 to 110 VDC gt 15 17 18 111 112 VDC gt 8 Input current on 1 signal 11 to 16 19 to 110 at 24 V DC mA 35 17 18 111 112 at24 V DC mA 2 2 Delay time for 0 to 1 Debounce ON ms 20 Debounce off typical 11 to 14 ms 0 025 15 16 19 110 ms 0 25 17 18 111 112 ms 0 15 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 417 Appendix E T N EZD R EZD T Delay time for 1 to 0 Debounce ON ms 20 Debounce OFF typical I1 to 14 ms 0 025 15 16 19 110 ms 0 25 17 18 111 112 ms 0 15 Cable length unshielded m 100 High speed counter inputs 11 to 14 Number 4 Cable length shielded m 20 High speed up and down counters Counting frequency kHz lt 3 Pulse shape Square wave Mark to space ratio 1 1 Frequency counters Counting frequency kHz lt 3 Pulse shape Square wave Mark to space ratio 1 1 Incremental encoder counters Counting frequency kHz lt 3 Pulse shape Square wave Counter inputs 11 and 12 13 and 14 2 Signal offset 90 Mark to space ratio 1 1 418 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data EZD R EZD T Analog inputs Number 4 Electrica
52. Program cycle Rung PWN re In conventional control systems a relay or contactor control processes all the rungs in parallel The speed with which a contactor switches is thus dependent on the components used and ranges from 15 to 40 ms for relay pick up and drop out With EZD the circuit diagram is processed with a microprocessor that simulates the contacts and relays of the circuit concerned and thus processes all switching operations considerably faster Depending on its size the EZD circuit diagram is processed cyclically every 0 1 to 40 ms During this time EZD passes through six segments in succession How EZD evaluates the circuit diagram Segment 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the first four segments EZD evaluates the contact fields in succession EZD checks whether contacts are switched in parallel or in series and saves the switching states of all contact fields In the fifth segment EZD assigns the new switching states to all the coils in one pass MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 385 Inside EZD E T N The sixth segment is located outside of the circuit diagram EZD uses this to Evaluating function blocks process the function blocks which are used the output data of a function block is updated immediately after processing EZD processes the function blocks according to the function block list gt FUNCTION RELAYS menu from top to bottom You can sort the func
53. REMOTE HARKER BRUDRATE 11920101E READ COM LINK i iMDO1 iMO00 REMOTE MARKER gt WRITE iMD00 iMO00 This menu only appears if COM LINK was selected Selecting or toggling between menu items PROGRAM m Cursors y j TOF lt FARAMETERS SET CLOCK ae Select or switch MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 27 EZD E T N Cursor display HH MM 4 29 The cursor flashes DO MM 05 05 YEAR 20l Full cursor B Move cursor with lt gt in circuit diagram also with v Value H M HH MM 14 29 DO MM 05 05 Change position with lt gt YEAR 2003 e Change values with v Flashing values menus are shown in grey in this manual Setting values TPE amp Change value v DO MM 03 10 lt Select cursor position in value lt gt YEAR 2002 4 Change value at position v Values fok Store entries Positions Value at Retain previous value 28 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N 2 installation The EZD must only be installed and wired up by qualified electricians or other persons familiar with the installation of electrical equipment Danger of electric shock Never carry out electrical work on the device while the power supply is switched on Always follow the safety rules e Switch off and isolate Ensure that the device is no longer live Secure against reclosing
54. Signal diagram o Switch on and switch off times are always based on the channel which switches first Response in the event of a power failure The power is removed between 15 00 and 17 00 The relay drops outand remains off even after the power returns since the first switching off time was at 16 00 HWOS A HWIS E POY M POY MO POY SU POY SU POFF 16 01 POM 12 01 POFF 18 00 When switched on EZD always updates the switching state on the basis of all the available switching time settings 228 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks 24 hour switching The time switch is to switch for 24 hours Switch on time at 0 00 on Monday and switch off time at 0 00 on Tuesday HWI A HWD E POW M DY TU rove ry POM 00 00 PON OFF POFF 00 00 Year time switch EZD is equipped with a real time clock which you can use in the circuit diagram as a 7 day time switch and a year time switch The procedure for setting the time is described under Section Setting date time and daylight saving time on Page 367 EZD provides 32 year time switches HY 01 to HY 32 for a total of 128 switching times Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set four on and off times The channels are set via the parameter display The time and date are backed up in the event of a power failure and continue to run However the ti
55. additional switching conditions 64 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting relay outputs The relay or transistor outputs are used to switch loads such as fluorescent tubes filament bulbs contactors relays or motors Check the technical thresholds and output data before installing such devices see chapter Technical data from Page 407 Connecting relay outputs EZD R a 10 000 000 io lee a 4 ee ai 230V 8A 2A wow 10x 58W ae 8 AB 16 A L1 L2 L3 115 250 V l 24 V Figure 47 EZD R relay outputs MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 65 Installation E T N EZ6 RE 2 12 12 T2 1 2 UA R Sis s1 8 al ss en es 24V 8A 2A 10 000 000 15V 8A 2A 230V 8A 2A Da 1000 W Nar Aa 10x sew we l sws labalata ata L1 L2 L3 115 230 V 24V Figure 48 EZ6 RE relay outputs EZ2 RE ENS nm S1 7 SOS MWA DA 10 000 000 15V 8A 2A 230V 8A 2A re 1000 at o co z A 10W 25 000 8A B 16 f D L1 L2 L3 115 230 V Lo 24V Figure 49 EZ2 RE relay outputs Unlike the inputs the EZD R EZ6 RE relay outputs can be connected to different lines Do notexceed the maximum vol
56. and their load Maximum total short circuit current A 8 Peak short circuit current A 16 Thermal cutout Yes Maximum switching frequency with constant resistive load Switch 40000 R 100 kQ depends on program and load ee Parallel connection of outputs with resistive load inductive load with Yes external suppression circuit gt Section Connecting transistor outputs Page 67 combination within a group Group 1 Q1 to Q4 Maximum number of outputs 4 Total maximum current A 2 Attention Outputs must be actuated simultaneously and for the same time duration Status display of the outputs LCD Status display if provided MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 423 Appendix E T N Inductive load without external suppressor circuit General explanations To 95 time in milliseconds until 95 of the stationary current is reached L To 95 3 X 10 65 3 X T Utilization category in groups for Q1 to Q4 Q5toQ8 To 95 1 ms Utilization factor per group g 0 25 R 40 0 Relative duty factor 100 L 16 mH Max switching frequency Switch 1500 f 0 5 Hz operations h Max duty factor DF 50 DC13 Utilization factor g 0 25 To 95 72 ms F a R2480 Relative duty factor 100 L 1 15H Max switching frequency Switch 1500 f 0 5 Hz operations h Max duty factor DF 50 424 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T
57. are controlled in all screens by means of Boolean variables As these only have two states 0 1 only two different messages can be output via each message text element If other variable types are used the number of possible message texts can be increased accordingly Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZS oftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Message Text 01 320 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen 2 Text 1 Text 2 Screen overview Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the activation of message texts by means of the associated variable The output of two different texts in one message text elementis also illustrated The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display The Message text tab is used to assign the message to be output with a particular state of the associated variable In this example if Q1 0 the message no data is output and Information is output if Q1 1 All other message text elements have only one message text which is displayed when the corresponding output Q 1 Q1 0 Q1 Q2 Q3 1 no data Information with Boolean operands Figure 172 Text display using Boolean operands Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of message texts by means of the associated variable A message textis also enlarged in the displ
58. be set greater than zero Value 1 doubles the pause time value 15 will increase itby a factor of 16 tonew x 1 n tonew New pause time tp pause time determined by the network n value on BUSDELAY An increase in the pause time means that fewer messages inputs outputs bit data word data are transferred per time unit The reaction speed of the entire controller depends on the baud rate the pause time and the quantity of transferred data The smaller the amount of data transferred the faster the reaction times of the system _ An increase in the pause time is only useful during commissioning To ensure that the data for the power flow display is updated faster in the PC a longer range for this data is created on the network within this pause time 340 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the EZ NET network Send each change on the inputs outputs SEND 10 The SEND IO function should be used if you wish to send any change in input or output status immediately to all other network stations SEND 1O should be activated if intelligent Stations have read access to the inputs and outputs of other Stations 21 02 8Q 01 etc SEND 10 i This means that the quantity of messages on the network can increase significantly If high speed counters are used the SEND IO function should be deactivated Otherwise the input data
59. box spanner with the designation M22 MS MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 37 Installation E T N Removing the display operating unit front mounting gt Unscrew the fixing element and remove the display operating unit Mounting the power supply CPU module If you wish to add expansion units to the power supply CPU module the top hat rail must be fitted beforehand Fitting the top hat rail Ensure that the cutout of the top hat rail was prepared for the fixing shafts according to the specified dimensions ng 60 pja 23 75 ew al Z A 0 2 ad 120 lee 30 la 38 75 216 a Figure 15 Top hat rail with cutout The two fixing shafts of the display operating unit are designed for a 2 space unit expansion device If you wish to fit wider expansion units the top hat rail must be supported at a third support point This third support point should be located in the area 216 mm from the end of the device It should not be possible to twist the top hat rail 38 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Caution The fixing shafts of the display operating unit are designed for mounting the expansion units Other devices such as contactors must not be mounted on this top hat rail Attach the expansion unit before fitting the top hat rail y Figure 16 Fitting the top hat rail
60. by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When changing to double fontsize ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the element can be adjusted as required You can set the size required by holding down the left mouse button and dragging a selection handle of the element frame When applicable ensure that the elements provide sufficient Space in all languages This can be checked easily in the screen overview The following examples explain the function of Static text Example program 1 different display formats The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The individual screens can be selected with the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Static_Text_01 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size 284 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes Screen 4 Screen 4 shows three static texts arranged in rows Example program 2 different display formats with password re
61. calculation of the proportional component an integral component and a differential component The PID controller must be enabled so that itcan work Coil DC EN is active If coil DC EN is not active the entire PID controller is deactivated and reset The manipulated variable is set to zero The corresponding coils for the P and D components must be active Example If only coils DC EP and DC EI are activated the controller operates as a PI controller The device calculates the manipulated variable every time the scan time T has elapsed If the scan time is zero the manipulated variable is calculated every cycle Equation of PID controller Y t Yp t i t Yp t Y t calculated manipulated variable with scan time t Yp t Value of the proportional component of the manipulated variable with scan time t Y t Value of the integral component of the manipulated variable with scan time t Yp t Value of the differential component of the manipulated variable with scan time t MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 217 Programming wiring E T N The proportional component in the PID controller The proportional component Y p is the product of the gain Kp and the control difference e The control difference is the difference between the setpoint Xs and the actual value Xj at a specified scan time The equation used by the device for the proportional component i
62. diagram In RUN mode itis used to check the circuit diagram using the Power flow display 134 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation Saving and loading programs EZD provides you with two ways of saving circuit diagrams externally Saving to a memory card e Saving ona PC with EZSoft Once they have been saved programs can be reloaded into EZD edited and run All program data is saved in EZD In the event of a power failure the data will be retained until the next time itis overwritten or deleted Memory card Each memory card contains a circuit diagram which is inserted into the EZD interface The EZD behaves in the following manner in accordance with the type and setting Requirement A valid circuit diagram must be stored on the card Variants with display Go to the CARD menu and load the circuit diagram into the unitin STOP mode via CARD gt DEVICE CARD MODE setting gt page 374 Variants without display If the circuit diagram on the card is different to the circuit diagram in the device the program from the card is loaded as soon as the power supply is turned on EZSoft EZSoft is a PC program for creating testing and managing EZD programs visualization applications and circuit diagrams Completed programs are exchanged between the PC and EZD via the connection cable Once you have transferred a circuit diagram you can start EZD strai
63. diagram is compatible This simplifies the processing of EZ800 programs EZ800 programs with text function blocks can be loaded directly onto the EZD either from the memory card or from EZSoft The contacts and coils are processed in the same way as in an EZ800 However texts are not output The function block requires the entire memory even if no texts have been transferred Do not use the text function block on the EZD device This will use up memory unnecessarily with unused functions Figure 109 EZD circuit diagram with a text output function block 210 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N DEI PIi BM Function blocks Contacts A contact has been assigned to the text output function block D01Q1 to D32Q1 text function block is active Coils DOLEN to D32EN enable of the text function block Memory requirement of the text output function block The text output function block requires 160 bytes of memory This is irrespective of the text size Data function block The data function block allows you to selectively save a value Setpoint values for the function block can be saved in this manner GTI G1 DBT DE1 bi Z D IEH Figure 110 EZD circuit diagram with data function block Parameter display and parameter set for the data function block DE16 Data block function bloc
64. for use Two devices EZD with EZ800 or EZD can be connected simply via the serial interfaces Circuit diagrams are connected up using ladder diagrams and each elementis entered directly via the EZD display For example you can connect make and break contacts in series and in parallel e switch output relays and auxiliary contacts e define outputs as coils impulse relays rising or falling edge triggered relays or as latching relays select timing relays with different functions on delayed on delayed with random switching off delayed 12 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Overview off delayed with random switching on and off delayed on and off delayed with random switching single pulse synchronous flashing asynchronous flashing use up and down counters count high speed signals up and down counters with upper and lower limit values preset frequency counters high speed counters count incremental encoder values compare values display graphics texts variables enter setpoints display flashing values and graphics change and replace graphics and texts by pushbutton process additional inputs and outputs use 7 day and year time switches count operating hours operating hours counter communicate via the integrated EZ NET network set up point to point communication via the serial interface provide closed loop control with P Pl and P
65. gt If you want to exit without saving the circuit diagram press ESC gt Use the cursor buttons to select the CANCEL menu Press OK The circuit diagram is closed without saving Searching for contacts and coils You can search for contacts and coils in the following way Press ESC Use the cursor buttons to select the SEARCH menu Press OK gt Selectthe desired contact coil and number with the v and lt gt cursor buttons With function relays select the function block the number and the coil gt Confirm the search with the OK button 142 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N I i 1 12 amp Di Hyotat L i 0 1 B 1140 a ie Di Hvoiad L i Cii B14 I M 1 12 H H 1i L 1 0 4 B 1141 Working with contacts and relays The device will search for the first occurrence of the contact or coil from the start of the search to the end of the circuit diagram If no contactor coil is found the EZD circuit diagram editor will continue the search from the start of the circuit diagram If a contact or coil is found the EZD editor automatically jumps to the respective field in the circuit diagram Go to a rung The EZD circuit diagram editor provides a Go To function in order to enable fast access to a rung gt P ress ESC and use the cursor buttons to select the GO TO menu Press OK gt Select t
66. image range asynchronously for data communication As the serial interface transfers large data volumes slower than the devices overwrite the image ranges the following applies one marker double word 1MD MD is consistent Within a program cycle a marker double word that is overwritten via COM LINK is not constant The data via the COM LINK is written to the status image over the course of the program cycle This means that a different marker value can be present at the start of the program cycle to after the write operation via COM LINK Sign of life detection COM LINK diagnostics contact ID09 In order to determine the proper functioning of the COM LINK connection the diagnostics contact D09 is provided on the active station of the COM LINK connection 354 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Introduction to COM LINK Status of diagnostics contact Status of the connection ID09 o COM LINK connection operating correctly or no COM LINK connection selected ag COM LINK connection not functioning faulty The time required to detect that the COM LINK is not working properly depends on the baud rate selected and the event concerned Baud rate Time required for detection of faulty COM LINK connection CRC error data content No response no hardware incorrect connection remote station notin operation 9600 Baud 250 ms 15s 19200 Baud 120 ms 0 8 s Atten
67. laden 348 REMOTE irinin eaiinieiia 348 Status CIS play ve iiiccesuaiveintarh cient vens 18 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Status image register oes eeeeeeteeeee 386 Suppressing contact DOUNCE eee 390 Switching Contact 139 CHANGE vireieatci ttarivasamiatatitartadatndect 136 System menu Selection eeeecsteeteestesseesneesteeteestesstesneenteestees 18 Temperature sensor CONNECTION ercer 62 Terminal MOG escecsesseseestsscseesssssesssessessnsessesaes 84 Tightening torque enssins 47 Time switch 24 hour SWItChiNg sssrin Overnight switching c cscsecsssesssesseseeeees Power faIIULC sesecscssestssrssestssrsssstssrsseerseserees Switching at the weekend Switching on working days Time overlaps ecserin Timing relay Ondelaye dionan Operating MOdES oes WINN eaae nina Tool for cage clamp terminals 0 eee Tool for EZD expansion UNlt eee TOPOlOGY amnia Two wire proximity SWItChesS c ccssessresssteseeeesseees Visualization data MN05013005E Ea o EE ANE NE E AENT 387 Weekday setting escncennrericnnnnnins 367 Wiring BaCkWardS eia 388 Deleting pnia iani eesigi orien 90 ENTENG iaiia nanan tian 90 Relay COIS aprire 152 RUES vinea aaa ani 152 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 441 Eaton Electrical 1000 Cherrington Parkway Moon Township PA 15108 4312 USA Tel 1 800 525 2000 www E atonE lectrical com E T N 2005
68. module Bus termination gt accessories Yes First and last station Plug connector gt accessories poles 8 Type RJ 45 426 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data EZD CP8 NT Cable cross sections with cable lengths and cable resistance m Cross section up to 1000 lt 16 mQ m mm AWG 1 5 16 Cross section up to 600 lt 26 mQ m mm AWG 0 75 to 0 8 18 Cross section up to 400 lt 40 mQ m mm AWG 0 5 to 0 6 20 19 Cross section up to 250 lt 60 mQ m mm AWG 0 34 to 0 5 22 21 20 Cross section up to 175 lt 70 mQ m mm AWG 0 25 to 0 34 23 22 Cross section up to 40 lt 140 mQ m mm AWG 0 13 26 1 Bus lengths above 40 m can only be achieved with cables with reinforced cross section and connection adapter MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 427 Appendix E T N List of the function blocks Function blocks Element Meaning of abbreviation Function block designation Page A analog value comparator Analog value comparator 158 AR arithmetic Arithmetic 161 BC block compare Data block compare 165 BT block transfer Data block transfer 172 BV Boolean operation Boolean operation 183 counter Counters 186 CF counter frequency Frequency counters 193 CH counter high speed High speed counters 197 Cl counter fast incremental Hi
69. network is functioning correctly gt Section Signs of life of the individual stations and diagnostics Page 344 Function of the date time function block If the trigger coil of the function block is activated the current date the day of the week and time from the sending station is automatically put onto the EZ NET network All other network stations must accept these values The station that sends its date and time does this when the seconds value is zero Example The trigger pulse is actuated at 03 32 21 hh mm ss The other stations are synchronized at 03 33 00 This time is accessed by all other stations This process can be repeated as often as desired The trigger coil must be triggered again from the 0 to the 1 state Accuracy of time synchronization The maximum time deviation between the functional stations is 5s Set cycle time EZD provides one set cycle time function block ST01 The set cycle time function block is a supplementary function block for the PID controller 254 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks The set cycle time function block provides a fixed cycle time for processing the circuit diagram and the function blocks Wiring a set cycle time function block The ST set cycle time function block is integrated in the circuit diagram as a coil To prevent unpredictable switching states
70. notneed a third relay contact so you can now wire the contacts directly up to the coil field MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 89 Commissioning L 1 Cit B 1944 I dz E T N Wiring EZD displays a small arrow s in the circuit diagram when creating the wiring Press ALT to activate the wiring arrow cursor and use the cursor buttons v lt gt to move it ALT also has two other functions depending on the cursor position Inthe leftcontact field you can press ALT to inserta new empty rung The contact under the cursor can be changed between a make and break contact by pressing the ALT button The wiring arrow works between contacts and relays When you move the arrow onto a contact or relay coil it changes back to the cursor and can be reactivated with ALT if required EZD automatically wires adjacent contacts in a rung up to the coil Press ALT to wire the cursor from I D2 through to the coil field The cursor changes into a flashing wiring arrow and automatically jumps to the next possible wiring position Press the cursor button gt Contact I D2 will be connected up to the coil field You can use DEL to erase a connection at the cursor or arrow position Where connections intersect the vertical connections are deleted first then if you press DEL again the horizontal connections are deleted 90
71. of the interval in which the function block is called by the operating system for processing The value range is between 0 and 6553 5 s If the value 0 is set the cycle time of the device is the pause time between the function block calls The device cycle time varies according to the length of the program With a scan time of 0 s this may cause an irregular control response Use the Set cycle time function block gt page 254 in order to keep the cycle time of the device constant Manual mode of the PID controller A value must be present at the M4 input in order to set the manipulated variable directly If the coil DC SE is activated the value at Ml is transferred as manipulated variable GM This value is presentfor as long as the DC SE coil is activated or the value at the MM input is changed If coil DC SE is deactivated the control algorithm is reactivated Extreme changes in the manipulated variable can occur when the manual manipulated variable is transferred or deactivated If the function block is running in UNI unipolar mode a negative signed manipulated variable value will be output Signal smoothing filter EZD provides 32 signal smoothing filters FT01 to FT32 The function block allows you to smooth noisy input signals MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 219 Programming wiring FTA yt TG PKP BM gt E T N Wiring a signal s
72. of the password has not yet been considered The password is now valid but not yet activated Selecting the scope of the password gt P ress the OK button gt Select the function to be protected or the menu P ress the OK button in order to protect the function or menu tick protected Standard protection encompasses the programs and circuit diagram At least one function or menu must be protected CIRCUIT DIAGRAM The password is effective on the program with circuit diagram and non enabled function blocks PARAMETERS The PARAMETERS menu is protected TIME Date and time are protected with the password OPERATING MODE The toggling of the RUN or STOP operating mode is protected INTERFACE The interface is inhibited for access to a connected device Programs orcommands to other devices connected via the NET network are routed further DELETE FUNCT After four failed attempts to enter a password the DELETE FUNCTION prompt appears This prompt is not displayed if selected However itis no longer possible to make changes in protected areas if you forget the password MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 359 EZD Settings E T N Activating the password You can activate an existing password in three different ways automatically when EZD is switched on again automatically after a protected circuit diagram is loaded automatically if a telegram has not been sent on the PC inter
73. on the display A value range from 0 to 9999 and Allow digit selection as input format are defined in the Number range format tab Input 101 is assigned make contact bit logic in the Operability tab The value is written to marker word 7 and accepted by counter input SH Q1is setto 1 if the counter actual value QV is greater than or equal to the upper setpoint SH If the actual value already has a higher value than the switch value you can reset the counter via 12 Q1 is immediately reset to 0 and is not active again until the Switch value is reached 314 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of the value entry via the set variable marker word MW05 preset actual value SV After you have entered a new value this is written to marker word MW05 by actuating 11 This is associated with the preset actual value SV of counter C02 When transferred the actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value Set entry 80 Transfer of value Set Set QV Entry 0K QV Entry OK 304 80 80 80 Transfer I1 Transfer I1 Figure 167 Transfer of value when 11 closes Screen 3 Screen 3 shows an example from the Number range format tab particularly the Scaling range area and Input format area gt Allow digit selection You can enter any value from 0 00 to 10 00 Allow digit selection After
74. range format tab Start Val Oms Setpoint 4000ms Act Val 1452ms Figure 161 Timing relay times 304 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Screen overview Screen 3 Screen 3 shows an example of outputting analog values here IA3 on the display Note the Scaling range field on the Number range format tab The screen contains three numerical values that output the analog value in different formats The values are associated with the analog input IA3 Associated variable tab which has a value provided as a DWord variable at the QV output FB parameter All numerical values are assigned a value range from 0 to 1019 as this scan range is defined by the connected potentiometer Table 13 Numerical value analog value output Numerical Display of the analog value 0 to 1019 value 1 Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 2 range 0 to 10 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 3 range 5 to 5 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt signed Analog input 13 Figure 358 O to 10 3 51V 5tot5 1 49V Figure 162 Analog value output MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 305 Visualization with EZD E T N Screen 4 Screen 4 shows an example of the output of analog values here IA3 on the display which is an exte
75. setpoint value is input for I1 and T the timing relay functions as a synchronous flasher The character means that the parameters of this timing relay can be modified using the PARAMETERS menu gt Confirm the value input with OK gt P ress ESC to leave circuit diagram entry gt Complete the circuit diagram PTest the circuit diagram using the power flow display gt Switch EZD to RUN mode and return to the circuit diagram Each parameter set can be displayed using the power flow display for the circuit diagram gt Move the cursor onto E 01 and press OK The parameter set for the counter is displayed with actual and setpoint values gt Move the cursor v downwards until you see the value QV gt gt Switch the input 15 The actual value changes On the display C_ indicates that the counting coil is actuated If the actual and upper setpoint values of the counter are the same the timing relay switches the warning light on and off every 2 seconds MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 275 Programming wiring E T N Doubling the flashing frequency THAL Ii 007 000 gt Select the power flow display T 11 and change the Ia constant of the setpoint time to 001 000 l as O 550 When you press OK the warning light will flash at twice the EH frequency On the display EM indicates that the enable coil is actuated Setpoint value settings with constants can be mod
76. shown in the above signal diagram in section B Figure 92 Simultaneous triggering of amp 04 In the example above the reset coil has priority with simultaneous triggering of the set and reset coils MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 153 Programming wiring E T N Coil negation inverse contactor function The outputsignal is simply an inversion of the input signal the relay operates like a contactor with contacts that have been negated If the coil is triggered with the 1 state the coil Switches its make contacts to the 0 state Figure 93 Signal diagram of inverse contactor function Rising edge evaluation cycle pulse If the coil is only meant to switch on a rising edge this function will be applied With a change in the coil state from 0 to 1 the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state for one cycle ea iii dhol Li i i i Figure 94 Signal diagram of cycle pulse with rising edge Falling edge evaluation cycle pulse l Ifthe coil is only meantto switch on a falling edge this function will be applied With a change in the coil state from 1 to 0 the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state for one cycle 154 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Working with contacts and relays oe a e E OE a OE O AA Figure 95 Signal diagram of cycle pulse with falling edge mS A set c
77. speed counter 1 counter input 11 to 14 2 upper setpoint value 3H 3 preset actual value 54 4 lower setpoint value 5L 5 enable of the counter CH EN 6 counting direction coil CH D For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 201 Programming wiring E T N 7 accept preset actual value coil CH SE 8 reset coil CH RE 9 contact make contact CH OF upper setpoint value reached exceeded 10 contact make contact CH FB lower setpoint value reached undershot 11 contact make contact CH ZE actual value equal to zero 12 out of value range Range A The counter has the value zero The contacts CH ZE actual value equal to zero and CH FB lower setpoint value undershot are active The counter receives counter values and increases the actual value CH ZE drops out as well as CH FB after the lower setpoint value is reached Range B The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper setpoint value The contact upper setpoint value CH OF becomes active e Range C The coil CH SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is setto the preset actual value The contacts go to the respective position Range D The counting direction coil CH D is actuated If counting pulses are present downward count is initiated Ifthe lower setpoint value is undershot the contact CH F B becomes active Range E The reset coil CH RE is activated The actual value is s
78. the Circuit diagram display and press the ALT button Press pushbutton actuator S1 Figure 71 Power flow display in Zoom function Input 1 and 12 are closed relay Q1 picked up E Contact closed coil is triggered C Contact opened coil dropped out MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 93 Commissioning E T N Press pushbutton actuator S2 thathas been connected as a break contact The rung is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out fi 0 Oo L i IT Use the cursor buttons v lt gt to move between the contacts or coil Press the cursor button gt L O02 ID The cursor moves to the second contact Press the ALT button The display changes to display status with contact and or coil designation L 1 C 2 RUN Figure 72 Power flow display Input I1 is closed input 12 is open relay Q1 has dropped out visible area 94 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N PROGRAM Creating your first circuit diagram Deleting the circuit diagram Switch the EZD to STOP mode EZD must be in STOP mode in order to extend delete or modify the circuit diagram gt Use PROGRAM to switch from the main menu to the next menu level gt Select DELETE PROGRAM The EZD will display the prompt DELETE gt P ress OK to delete the program or ESC to cancel Press ESC to return to
79. the Status display Fast circuit diagram entry You can create a circuit diagram in several ways The first option is to enter the elements in the circuit and then to wire all the elements together The other option is to use the enhanced operator guidance of the EZD and create the circuit diagram in one go from the first contact through to the last coil If you use the first option you will have to select some of the elements in order to create and connect up your circuit diagram The second faster option is what you learned in the example In this case you create the entire rung from left to right MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 95 Commissioning E T N Configuring an EZ NET network If you want to work with the EZ NET network and communicate with several stations the network must be configured first Proceed as follows Connect all network stations EZ NET socket 2T to EZ NET socket 14 gt The first station 1 socket 14 and the last station socket 27 must be provided with a network termination resistor gt Connect all stations to the power supply Figure 73 Example topology with two EZ NET stations Network termination resistor Physical location C Station number gt Switch on the power supply on all stations Ensure that all stations have
80. the inductive load If inductive loads are not suppressed the following applies Several inductive loads should not be switched off simultaneously to avoid overheating the driver blocks in the worst possible case If in the event of an emergency stop the 24 V DC power supply is to be switched off by means ofa contact and if this would mean switching off more than one controlled output with an inductive load then you must provide suppressor circuits for these loads following diagrams 24V Figure 52 Inductivity with suppressor circuit 68 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting analog outputs Behavior with short circuit overload Should a short circuit or overload occur on a transistor output this output will switch off The output will switch on up to maximum temperature after the cooling time has elapsed This time depends on the ambient temperature and the current involved If the fault condition persists the output will keep switching off and on until the faultis corrected or until the power supply is switched off gt Section Monitoring of short circuitfoverload with EZ D T Page 393 Connecting analog outputs EZD RA and EZD TA each have an analog output QA 01 0 V to 10 V DC 10 bit resolution 0 to 1023 The analog output allows you to control servo valves and other final controlling elements Caution Analog signals are mo
81. the maximum value in the Value range field Enter min as the unit of measure Enter 0 in the activated Scaling range field as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value 300 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Programming in EZSoft P Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Numerical value screen element into the screen gt Position the mouse above the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Three sizes are available Normal font Double font and Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient Space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as required by dragging the selection handle on the sides Associated variable tab On the Associated variable tab you define the Boolean variable for activating the numerical value Number range format tab The Number range format tab is used for defining the following Value range e Unit of measure Scaling range Display change and Showing a signed value MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical co
82. the number of the markers is the start of comparison range 1 or 2 Specifying the marker range with offset If you wish to work with an offset specify one of the following variables at function block input 14 or T Constant Actual value QV of a function block Analog input lA Analog output QA The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MBO1 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts BCO1E1 to BC32E1 the number of comparison elements exceeds one of the comparison ranges BCO1E2 to BC32E2 the two comparison ranges overlap BCO1E3 to BC32E3 the specified offset of the comparison ranges is outside of the permissible range 166 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks BCO1EQ to BC32EQ output of the comparison result Only valid if the BC EN enable has been triggered Status 0 Comparison ranges not equal Status 1 Comparison ranges equal Coils BCOLEN to BC32EN Enable coil of the data block comparator function block Memory requirement of the data block comparator function block The data block comparator function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Function of the data block comparator function block The data block comparator function block compares two consistent data blocks The comparison is active if the BC EN enable is tr
83. the respective diagnostics contact should be evaluated and the information applied in accordance with its respective application If the respective diagnostics contacts are not evaluated it may cause faults in your application The data to be read from a faulty station is setto 0 after the fault is detected 346 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the EZ NET network Network transmission security EZ NET is a CAN based network CAN is used in cars and commercial vehicles in all areas The same fault recognition capability with data transfer applies as with CAN A BOSCH Study relating to undiscovered and corrupt messages determined the following The probability of non discovery of a corrupted message residual error probability is lt 10 10 message error rate The message error rate depends on Bus loading Telegram length e Malfunction frequency e Number of stations Example Network with 500 Kbaud average bus load 25 average operating time 2000 h year average error rate of 10 3 i e 1 message is faulty every 1000 transmission of 1 12 x 1010 messages per year of which 1 12 x 107 messages are faulty residual error probability r lt 10 10 x 10 3 10 23 This means one of 1013 messages is so corrupt that the fault cannot be recognized as such For a network this corresponds to a working time of approx 1000 years
84. the setpoint value The actual value changes and falls below the value of the setpoint value minus the hysteresis The contact goes to the normal position Range B Compare 11 lt 12 The actual value drops The contact switches if the actual reaches the setpoint value The actual value changes and rises above the value of the setpoint value plus hysteresis The contact goes to the normal position e Range C Compare 14 gt 1z with offset This example behaves as described in Range A The offset value is added to the actual value Comparison 11 31 The contact switches on Ifthe setpoint is exceeded with the actual value rising Ifthe setpoint is undershot with the actual value decreasing The contact switches off Ifthe hysteresis limit is exceeded with the actual value rising Ifthe hysteresis limit is undershot with the actual value decreasing Arithmetic function block EZD provides 32 arithmetic function blocks AR 01 to AR32 The arithmetic function block is used for arithmetic operations All four basic arithmetic operations are supported add subtract multiply divide MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 161 Programming wiring ARIE ACD I rIg BM E T N Inputs The function block inputs 11 and 12 can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IAQ1 terminal 7 1A02
85. www EatonElectrical com 59 Installation E T N Connecting analog inputs Inputs 17 18 111 and 112 can also be used to connect analog voltages ranging from 0 V to 10 V The following applies 17 IA01 18 1A02 11 1A03 112 1A04 The resolution is 10 bit 0 to 1023 Caution Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals Consequently more care must be taken when laying and connecting the signal lines Incorrect Switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly gt Use shielded twisted pair cables to prevent interference with the analog signals gt For short cable lengths ground the shield at both ends using a large contact area If the cable length exceeds 30 m or so grounding at both ends can result in equalization currents between the two grounding points and thus in the interference of analog signals In this case only ground the cable at one end gt Do not lay signal lines parallel to power cables gt Connectinductive loads to be switched via the EZD outputs to a separate power feed or use a Suppressor circuit for motors and valves If loads such as motors solenoid valves or contactors are operated with EZD via the same power feed switching may give rise to interference on the analog input signals 60 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs The following circuits contain examples of applicat
86. x 01 J2 v Jv The switching behavior of these relays is set by the coil functions and parameters selected The options for setting outputand marker relays are listed with the description of each coil function The function block coil functions and parameters are listed with the description of each function block type 128 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation Markers analog operands Specific markers are available for actively addressing values or inputs outputs Table 8 Markers Markers EZD Number Value Access type display range Analog operand r Read w Write Marker 32 bit Mo 1 98 32 bit r w Marker 16 bit Mi 11 46 16 bit r wW Marker 8 bit ME 11 16 8 bit r w Marker 1 bit H 1 16 1 bit r w Analog inputs IA X x 01 04 10 bit r basic unit Analog output BAX x 10 bit rW When using the COM communication mode you can make the following data accesses on the slave Note the REMOTE MARKER SETTING in the following table MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 129 Programming wiring E T N Markers EZD Number Value Access type display range Analog operand r Read w Write Marker 32 bit iHD li 32 bit r wW Marker 16 bit iHi li 16 bit r wW Marker 8 bit HE li 8 bit r wW Marker 1 bit iH 1 46 1 bit r wW Analog inputs 1A x MEO 04 10 bit r basic unit Analog output 10A X zli 10
87. 0 F 98 b 15 43 71 G 99 c 16 44 72 H 100 d 17 45 73 l 101 e 18 46 74 J 102 f 19 41 75 K 103 g 20 48 0 76 L 104 h 21 49 1 71 M 105 i 22 50 2 78 N 106 j 23 51 3 79 0 107 k 24 52 4 80 B 108 l 25 53 5 81 Q 109 m 26 54 6 82 R 110 n 27 55 i 83 S 111 0 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 279 Visualization with EZD E T N Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning 12 Ge 14 fe 170 fo 10 113 q 142 171 Y 200 114 r 143 A 172 Y 201 115 s 144 173 i 202 116 t 145 174 203 117 u 146 175 204 118 v 147 176 205 119 w 148 177 206 120 x 149 178 207 n 121 y 150 179 208 122 Z 151 180 209 123 152 y 181 A 210 E 124 153 182 A 211 125 154 U 183 212 126 155 g 184 213 i 127 156 185 214 128 157 186 215 129 158 x 187 216 130 159 f 188 217 131 160 189 218 132 161 190 219 133 162 191 220 134 163 192 221 135 164 193 222 i 136 165 N 194 223 137 166 2 195 224 138 167 2 196 225 B 139 i 168 i 197 226 140 169 198 a 227 0 280 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning 228 235 U 242 249 229 60 236
88. 0 Light Pilot Duty Max rated operational voltage VAC 300 Max thermal uninterrupted current cos p 1 A 5 at B300 Maximum make break capacity cos pk 1 Make break VA 3600 360 at B300 DC Control Circuit Rating Codes utilization category R300 Light Pilot Duty Max rated operational voltage VDC 300 Max thermal uninterrupted current at R300 A 1 Maximum make break capacity at R300 VA 28 28 Transistor outputs EZD T Number of outputs 4 Contacts Semiconductors Rated voltage Us VDC 24 Permissible range VDC 20 4 to 28 8 Residual ripple 5 Supply current On 0 state typical maximum mA 18 32 On 1 state typical maximum mA 24 44 Reverse polarity protection Yes Attention If voltage is applied to the outputs when the polarity of the power supply is reversed this will result in a short circuit Potential isolation to the inputs supply voltage PC interface memory card Yes NET network EZ LINK Rated current k at state 1 maximum A 0 5 422 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Technical data EZD T Lamp load Q1 to Q4 without Ry W 5 Residual current at state 0 per channel mA lt 0 1 Max output voltage On 0 state with external load 10 MO V 2 5 On 1 state le 0 5A U U 1V Short circuit protection Yes Thermal Q1 to Q4 evaluation with diagnostics inputs 116 115 Short circuit tripping current for Ra 10 mQ A 0 7 Sk S2 depending on number of active channels
89. 0 and 9 30 and between 17 00 and 22 30 HWOi A HDT E POY M POY MO POY FR POY FR POM 16 30 ON 17 01 POFF 09 30 POFF df 226 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Switching at the weekend Time switch HW02 switches on at 16 00 on Friday and switches off at 6 00 on Monday Hoe A POY FR DYE OFF POM 16 01 HWD E rovi M roye OH OFF 06 00 FR CSA SU MO A on B on o Ss 2 Figure 117 Signal diagram of weekend Overnight switching Time switch HW03 switches on overnight at 22 00 Monday and switches off at 6 00 on Tuesday HWoi D POY HO DYE POM df POFF 06 00 MO TU pon T on Ter l Figure 118 Signal diagram for night switching If the Off time is before the On time EZD will switch off on the following day MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 227 Programming wiring E T N Time overlaps The time settings of a time switch overlap The clock switches on at 16 00 on Monday whereas on Tuesday and Wednesday it switches on at 10 00 On Monday to Wednesday the Switching off time is 22 00 HWO4 A HWY E POY MO POY TU POY WE POY WE N 16 01 POM 10 00 POFF 22 01 POFF 00 00 MO TU WE TH B 10 00 24 00 10 00 22 00 overlaps Figure 119
90. 05013005E E T N Startup behavior Otherwise select RUN MODE and press OK DEBOUNC RUN mode is activated FUN MODE Fi Press ESC to return to the Status display CARO MODE Deactivating RUN mode DEBOUHCE pSelectRUN MODE and press OK T PATTOG The RUN mode function is deactivated CARD HOD 4 The default setting for E ZD is for RUN MODE to be displayed MRO MORE In other words EZD starts in RUN MODE 4 when the power is switched on Startup behavior Menu display Status of EZD after startup EZD starts in STOP RUN MODE EZD is in STOP mode mode EZD starts inRUN mode RUN MODE lt EZD is in RUN mode Behavior when the circuit diagram is deleted The setting for the startup behavior is an EZD device function When the circuit diagram is deleted this does not resultin the loss of the setting selected Behavior during upload download to card or PC When a valid circuit diagram is transferred from EZD to a memory card or the PC or vice versa the setting is stil retained mS The EZD devices without a display can only be started in RUN mode MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 373 E T N EZD Settings _ DEBOUNCE i F BUTTONS RUN MODE CARO MODE i Possible faults EZD will not startin RUN mode a program is not available in EZD you have selected EZD startup in STOP MODE RUN MODE menu Card startup behavior The startu
91. 1 The first screen contains five half overlaid bitmaps These are activated via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and marker M01 and appear in the display The half overlaid bitmaps are activated in succession The Covered option is selected in the Background area of the Display tab therefore causing the overlaid part of the bitmap to be covered by the bitmap in front of it In this way itis possible to create the impression of a moving arrow 298 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Screen overview HaLf overlaid Half overlaid Figure 157 Overlaid bitmaps Screen 2 The second screen contains five overlaid bitmaps with each subsequent bitmap being larger than the previous one displayed The individual bitmaps are made visible in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and the marker M01 break contact bit logic The Covered option is selected in the Background area of the Display tab therefore causing the overlaid part of the bitmap to be covered by the bitmap in front of it In this way itis possible to create the impression of a moving and expanding arrow OverLlaid OverLlaid Figure 158 Expanding arrow Screen 3 The third screen contains five fully overlaid bitmaps These are made invisible in succession from the top to the bottom via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and the LED 3 make contact bit logic The Covered option is selected in the Background area o
92. 100010101101 The comparison result of the function block BC01 is BCO1EQ 0 the data block ranges do not have the same content MB65 and MD81 Byte 2 are not identical Example Comparison of marker blocks range violation error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MD60 Block 2 at MD90 Each block is 30 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MORI Comparison range 2 T2 MDD Number of bytes MO 40 The comparison is in byte format MD90 to MD96 is 28 bytes The number of bytes is 30 bytes 170 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Function blocks The error message Number of comparison elements exceeds one of the comparison ranges is output BCO1E1is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks range overlap error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MW60 Block 2 at MW64 Each block is 12 bytes long Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison range 1 311 MWbl Comparison range 2 12 MWb4 Number of bytes NO 12 The comparison is in byte format MW60 to MW64 is 8 bytes The number of bytes is 12 bytes The error message Comparison ranges overlap is output BCO1E2 is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks invalid offset error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MW40 Block 2 at MW54 The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison ra
93. 11 closes the preset actual value SV is transferred When transferred the actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value The maximum scaling range 10 00 is assigned to the maximum value range 9999 The value of QV will therefore jump to 9999 when the entered value is 10 00 and I1 is actuated Value entry 10 00 QV value 9999 AlLLowdigit selec ALLowdigit selec Set entry Set entry Qv OK Qv OK 15 10 00 9999 10 00 Figure 168 Transfer of value with Allow digit selection set Screen 4 Screen 4 shows an example of the Number range format tab particularly the Scaling range area and Input format area gt Fixed step width You can enter any value from 0 00 to 10 00 in step widths of 0 50 fixed step width After 11 closes the preset actual value SV is transferred When transferred the MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 315 Visualization with EZD E T N actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value The maximum scaling range 10 00 is assigned to the maximum value range 9999 The value of QV will therefore jump to 9999 when the entered value is 10 00 and 11 is actuated Value entry Transfer of QV value Step width Step width Set entry Set entry Qv 0K Qv 0K 16 8 50 8500 8 50 Figure 169 Transfer of value with fixed step width set Screen 5 Screen 5 show
94. 15 230 V 50 60 Hz 85 264 V Figure 34 Connecting the inputs Warning The AC inputs must only be used with EZD AC CP8 devices Other devices may be destroyed 54 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs AC expansion device VO COGOVLOP YP OOVLOOO E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 L N N 115 230 V Figure 35 Inputs on the EZ AC E expansion device Connect the inputs for example to pushbutton actuators switches or relay contactor contacts Input signal voltage range OFF signal 0 to 40 V ON signal 79 to 264 V Input current 1 to 112 0 5 mA 0 2 mA at 230 V 115 V R1ltoR12 0 5 mA 0 25 mA at 230 V 115 V Cable lengths Severe interference can cause a 1 signal on the inputs without a proper signal being applied Observe therefore the following maximum cable lengths 1 to 112 and R1 to R12 40 m without additional circuit MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 55 Installation E T N The following applies to expansion units With longer cables connect a diode e g 1N4007 for 1 A minimum 1000 V reverse voltage in series to the EZ input Ensure that the diode is pointing towards the input as shown in the circuit diagram otherwise EZ will not de
95. 16 EZD circuit diagram with 7 day time switch Parameter display and parameter set for the 7 day time switch HW Hwi 7 day time switch function block number 14 A Time switch channel A Appears in the parameter display Dvi Day 1 OYE Day2 OH On time gt OFF Offtime Channels 4 channels are available per time switch channels A B C and D These channels all act on the contact of the 7 day time switch Day 1 and day 2 Either the time period acts from day 1 to day 2 e g Monday to Friday or for one day only Monday MO Tuesday TU Wednesday WE Thursday TH Friday FR Saturday SA Sunday SU Time 00 00 to 23 59 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts HW01Q1 to HW32Q1 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 225 Programming wiring E T N Memory requirement of the 7 day time switch The 7 day time switch function block requires 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per channel used Function of the 7 day time switch The switching points are defined according to the parameters entered MO to FR on the weekdays Mo Tu We Th Fr ON 10 00 OFF 18 00 on and off switching times for the individual days of the week MO every Monday ON 10 00 switch on time SA every Saturday OFF 18 00 switch off time Switching on working days Time switch HW01 switches on Monday to Friday between 6 3
96. 1MD20 MD20 1MW39 1 MW40 MW39 MW40 1 MB77 1MB78 1MB79 1MB80 MB77 MB78 MB79 MB80 The normal rules for addressing the markers apply Ensure a clear separation of the write range of the two COM LINK BRUORATE 192006 REMOTE MARKER Stations The active station should write different markers to the remote station Otherwise the markers in the last write operation will be overwritten Configuration of the COM LINK The active station must have the following settings in order for the COM LINK connection to be functional Baud rate COM LINK active Remote marker range data exchange range Baud rate COM LINK The baud rate can be 9600 Baud or 19200 Baud gt In normal applications select the higher baud rate of 19200 Baud The baud rate of 9600 baud should only be selected if the connection is frequently faulty Factory setting 9600 Baud 352 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N BRUORATE 142006 COM LINK y REMOTE MARKER READ 1MD11 iMD0D15 WRITE iMDib 1MD1E Introduction to COM LINK Activating COM LINK COM LINK must be activated in order for it to function Factory setting not active The tick on the COM LINK menu item indicates that COM LINK is active Remote markers COM LINK data exchange range The REMOTE MARKER menu only opens if a tick is displayed next to COM LINK Selectthe REMOTE MARKER men
97. 2 PT1 to 8 to 16 1 to 32 SN1 to 32 to 32 The RN SN connection is a point to point connection between the stations indicated With RN and SN the number of the contact must have the same number as the coil Example 2SN30 from station 8 is sent to 8R N30 of Station 2 336 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN EZ NET network topologies addressing Every station with a circuit diagram has read access to the physical station inputs and outputs of other stations and can process them locally Example 1 Station 1 is to read the input I1 of station 2 and write to output Q1 of station 2 Station 2 does not have a circuit diagram Figure 182 Circuit diagram in station 1 Example 2 Marker M 01 of station 4 is to switch the output Q1 of station 3 via the network Both stations have a circuit diagram HI EISN 01 Figure 183 Circuit diagram in station 4 Set coil 01 in station 3 Figure 184 Circuit diagram in station 3 Get value from coil 01 in Station 4 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 337 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Functions of the stations in the network The stations on the EZ NET can have two different functions e Intelligent stations with their own programs stations 1 to 8 Input output devices REMOTE 10 without their own program stations 2 to 8
98. 243 Vy 250 230 u 237 244 1 251 1 231 b 238 245 252 3 232 p 239 246 253 2 233 U 240 247 254 234 U 241 248 255 Screen overview The first time the visualization function is called the screen overview will appear with the following tabs Screens Passwords Languages Screen activation Screens tab The Screens tab is used for entering the screen name the Start screen and password protection if required for the screens concerned Passwords tab The Passwords tab enables you to define up to three passwords and assign a logouttime with each one for closing the screen Languages tab The Languages tab is used for entering different languages that are to be used You can then define texts in these languages for all the text elements of the visualization program However only one download language can be defined for downloading to the device This is also defined here and can be modified quickly when the devices are commissioned MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 281 Visualization with EZD E T N You can export import the languages to from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet enabling texts to be sent off in this way for external translation Screen activation tab The Screen activation tab allows you to define associated variables for activating the screen The variables available depend on the variable type concerned Y ou can use markers Byte Word DW
99. 3 OVE NIEW hirere ani arraia R E 151 COM LINK dicivet tisicdectastivetntarstiatan risen ananaentars 348 Achva boMa aininn inana 353 Baudira tE minsann A 352 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 435 E T N Configuration seeren 352 Data access oiii 350 387 Pe principle ose eee tesecseeseeeteenteeteees 354 Sign of life detection eccceeseeeneen 354 Connecting the brightness S NSOF c eee 62 Connecting the setpoint potentiometer 61 Connecting transistor OUtDULS oo cece 67 Connection 20 MASENSOP iiiveninidiidiiiannidannar 62 Analog INPUTS eects etter 60 Analog OUDDUE istic catia diiecmrids tense dis 69 Brightness SENSora 62 Contactors relays eseese 65 Frequency generator sccerccncrccssrs 63 High speed Counters sssscccccrsssnreesn 63 Incremental encoder 64 EZD AC power Supply sceccncnssnreen 49 EZD DC INpUtS o sssccssessesstssssressessessesessseesrsees 58 EZD DC power SUPDIY seein 51 NET NetWOTK ssrin 71 OUIPULS iiia oina anol madras 64 Proximity SWItCh erener 58 Pushbutton actuators switches sss 55 58 Relay OUtQUES cesses esters 65 Serial iNterfaCe ssssessessessssssstsssessesseeesssesensess 76 Setpoint potentiometer eerren 61 Temperature SCNSOM sssrin 62 Transistor OUtDUES sccccccisnnerrrsnnn 67 Connection cross sections EZD cables v csscsssesssssesssssessrssesrsssesessseesnsseees 47 Screw terminals cssessessrssesessessesseeesssessnsees 47 Connections Delet g siniora 1
100. 398 SAVIN Oii areari 398 R Relay coil CHANGE iesiri 136 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 439 E T N y Connecting the outputs OVEVIEW initiatie Removing INPUTS OUTPUES innr 42 Power supply CPU module cee 43 ROSCb ccttsssscrastnutsarsatsnadiarasteistratensigbiteits 153 Retention Sa DONAVIOT sissies 379 Transferring behavior sssrin 381 Retention requirements Permitted EZD models erreren 379 Retentive behavior enssins 381 On circuit diagram transfer c csccsereeeees 381 Setn ae 379 RUN start behavior 84 RUN STOP Changeover sccccccrrnnnccnnns 92 Run Add DEW iinic 90 DeletNg itiicniivinarcaidiidatiniaamiai 143 a E E NEA 141 Number 133 Screw MOUN NG sessssiserseesssirrrsrrrsrrerssssrirrersnsrrrnree Sealing the protective cover Sensor 20 mA connection 440 Serial interface csscessessssssstsssesessessssessssseeessseees SC E A E E ids Setpoint ai Setting LCD backlight 376 Setting LCD contrast 376 Setting the time rreri 367 SNOFECICUIbs a ietataxstndiarnnmiarniens 69 393 Monitoring with EZD D T cscs 393 Startup DENAVIO cece eset 372 374 After the circuit diagram is deleted 4 373 Basic Setting s 373 375 376 377 a Possible TAUIS nriaicnnannauniiianaa 374 Seting scirvarann irinen eisten ir a anaa 372 With upload download to card or PC 373 Station ACUN Ei tritiscctiterteticsesarinbeterdatitn
101. 40 EntEnNg iranieni riiai 139 Position in circuit diAQFAM sesssesecesseseesees 133 Contact fields aE 133 Counter relay 186 203 Parameters Leere 194 198 204 Counters High speed ssssscccrrrerrcnnnnsn 63 197 High speed incremental encoder 203 Cursor display CYCIG cennau serana 385 Data consis teny ainoina iran 354 Debounce S UING sninen a n 370 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N MN05013005E Delay times FOP EZD DG ii icuidcadiunnidcadnaiudea 391 Input and OUDUL eects eesteseeeeeee 390 Deleting retentive actual values cece 380 Device OVEIVICW ssesesssessstessesesseserssessnsressnsetsenseess 14 DIMENSIONS EZD osisssa 407 EXxpandiN gien aiina aaeain 79 Expanding INpU S rererere 79 Expanding OUtQUES oo eesneesteeeeey 79 Expansion Localia oaa 79 ROMO ciiaiasciaicsciuineraransainiraiaiiaie 81 EZD AC E AC expansion units 50 EZD Evaluating the circuit diagram 385 Operating modes wiiiaiicissedciseunirnn 84 OVELVICW neninn 14 FIXING brackets sssseesessesessessessessrssessreresensessenseess 45 Frequency COUNLELS sccccccrccnsriinis 193 Function blocks Evaliathg esnin 386 UiS teea nakun aa a a aaee 428 Function relay Counter ea EE EE ane diets 203 Counter high speed cece 197 Counter high speed incremental encoder 203 COUNTES atena E 186 Example neirinnen 272 Frequency COUNTESS cecessteeseeeesteeteeneees 193 OVEGTVIQW E A E E 156 TIME S Wit
102. 40 Number of bytes M 2 The transfer is in byte format 12 bytes are to be copied The range MD60 to MD62 is 12 bytes This is copied to the range MW40 to MW45 180 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Comparison Value of marker range 1 Comparison Value of marker range 2 range 1 decimal binary range 2 decimal binary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fter a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the values are copied to the appropriate range Example Copying of marker bytes destination range violation error The value of marker bytes MB81 to MB96 is to be transferred to MD93 MD94 MD95 and MD96 The length is 16 bytes Parameters of BTO1 function block Source range Ti MEAT Destination range 12 MD494 Number of bytes MO 18 MN05013005E For more inform
103. 5 70 0 25 to 0 34 23 22 up to 250 60 0 34 to 0 5 22 21 20 up to 400 40 0 5 to 0 6 20 19 up to 600 S26 0 75 to 0 8 18 up to 1000 16 1 5 16 The surge impedance of the cables used must be 120 Q With cables gt 500 m it may be feasible to install a fiber optic run 72 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the NET network Calculating the cable length with known cable resistance If the resistance of the cable per unit of length is known resistance per unit length R in Q m the entire cable resistance R must not exceed the following values R depends on the selected baud rates Baud rate Cable resistance Ry KBaud Q 10 to 125 S 30 250 5 500 Sil 1000 Imax maximum cable length in m R_ Total cable resistance in Q R Cable resistance per unit length in Q m Imax R Calculating cross section with known cable lengths The minimum cross section is determined for the known maximum extent of the network l cable length in m Smin minimum cable cross section in mm pcu resistivity of copper if not otherwise stated 0 018 Qmm2 m 1X peu 12 4 Smin If the result of the calculation does not yield a standard cross section the next larger cross section is used MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 73 Installation E T N Calculating length with known cable cross section The maximum cable le
104. 50000 e Value range 0 to 4000 Unit ms e Units Scaling range None Scaling range 0 to 4 e Always show sign No e Decimal place 1 e Always show sign No Numerical value 3 Numerical value 3 e Value range 0 to 50000 e Value range 0 to 4000 Unit ms Units Scaling range None Scaling range 0 to 4 e Always show sign Yes Decimal places 2 e Always show sign Yes Timer 4 1873 2 1873ms 1 9s 1873ms 1 87s Figure 160 Output formats MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 303 Visualization with EZD E T N Screen 2 Screen 2 shows a simple example of the visualization of timing relay times using the function block parameter FB parameter from the Associated variable tab The screen contains three numerical values These are associated with the QV output of timing relay T04 Table 12 Numerical value visualization of timing relay times Numerical Start value of the timing relay T04 value 1 FB parameter 12 zero as input 12 is not assigned with on delayed relays Numerical Setpoint of the timing relay T04 value 2 FB parameter 11 4000 as input I1 is assigned with the constant 4 s 4000 ms in the function block editor Numerical Actual value of the timing relay T04 value 3 FB parameter QV display of value present at the function block output In order for the values to be displayed meaningfully ms milliseconds is entered in the Unit of measure field in the Number
105. 6 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation Moving through menus and choosing values Show System menu Go to next menu level Select menu item Activate modify save your entry Return to last menu level Cancel your entry since the lastOK y Change menu item Change value Change place Function of P buttons lt Input P 1 Input P2 gt Input P3 InputP4 Resetthe EZD display lt gt MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 17 EZD E T N Selecting main and system menu Status display a aes R F DEL and GD po MO D200 pofo it STOF Sib A No password O amp ESC Current selection FROGRAM SECURITY flashes in STOR RUN SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU LANGUAGE the EZD menu SET CLOCK CONFIGURATOR 1st menu level 1st menu level Main menu System menu Date display eo E ENS f F GD i B stop EB Bee HO 04 04 2002 94 ETOP EZD Status display Inputs I 1 Display operating mode Terminal F mode MO 02 00 Weekday Time 44 STOF or Weekday Date Outputs RUN STOP BUSY mode On 1 2 3 Off 18 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation RE Ti COM AC oc Gi ST Status display for local expansion Inputs
106. 6 Setting date time and daylight saving time 367 Changing between winter summer time DST 368 Activating input delay debounce 370 Deactivating debounce input delay 370 Activating and deactivating the P buttons 371 Activating the P buttons 371 Deactivating the P buttons 372 Startup behavior 372 Setting the startup behavior 372 Behavior when the circuit diagram is deleted 373 Behavior during upload download to card or PC 373 Possible faults 374 Card startup behavior 374 Terminal mode 375 Setting LCD contrast and backlight 376 Retention 378 Requirements 379 Setting retentive behavior 379 Deleting ranges 380 Deleting retentive actual values of markers and function blocks 380 Transferring retentive behavior 381 Displaying device information 382 8 Inside EZD 385 EZD Program cycle 385 How EZD evaluates the high speed counters CF CH and Cl 389 Memory management of the EZD 389 Delay times for inputs and outputs 390 Delay times for the EZD inputs 391 Monitoring of short circuit overload with EZ D T 393 Expanding EZD 395 How is an expansion unit recognized 395 Transfer behavior 396 Function monitoring of expansion units 396 QA analog output 398 Loading and saving programs 398 EZD without display and keypad 398 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Interface 399 Memory card 399 EZSoft 404 Device version 406 Appendix 407 Te
107. DC is protected against polarity reversal To ensure that EZ works correctly ensure thatthe polarity of each terminal is correct Cable protection With EZ AC EZ DC and the EZD power supply CP U module provide cable protection F1 for at least 1 A slow When EZ or the EZD is switched on for the first time its power supply circuit behaves like a capacitor Use a Suitable device for switching on the power supply and do not use any reed relay contacts or proximity switches 52 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs Connecting the inputs EZ or EZD inputs switch electronically Once you have connected a contact via an input terminal you can reuse itas a contact in your EZD circuit diagram as often as you like SS ST See eS Ss es eo se ee ee Figure 33 Connecting the inputs Connect contacts such as pushbutton actuators or switches to EZ or EZD input terminals Connecting the AC inputs Caution Connect up the AC inputs in accordance with the safety requirements of the VDE IEC UL and CSA with the same phase conductor that provides the power supply Otherwise EZ will not detect the switching level and may be damaged or destroyed by overvoltage MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 53 Installation E TeN EZD AC basic unit 11 112 0 5 mA 230 V 11 112 0 25 mA 115 V U 1
108. DEVICE DELETE CARD gt E T N If you are using a display without a keypad load the programs with the EZSoft software The function for automatically loading from the memory card on power up is only supported on EZD CP8 without display and display operating unit Switch to STOP mode gt Select PROGRAM from the main menu gt Select the CARD menu option The CARD menu option will only appear if you have inserted a functional memory card You can transfer a circuit diagram from EZD to the card and from the card to the EZD memory or delete the content of the card If the operating voltage fails during communication with the card repeat the last procedure since EZD may not have transferred or deleted all the data gt After transmission remove the memory card and close the cover Saving a circuit diagram on the card gt Select DEVICE CARD gt Confirm the prompt with OK to delete the contents of the memory card and replace it with the EZD circuit diagram Press ESC to cancel 402 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Loading and saving programs Loading a circuit diagram from the card gt Select the CARD gt DEVICE menu option gt P ress OK to confirm the prompt if you want to delete the EZD memory and replace it with the card content DEVICE CARD Press ESC to cancel Sas ete If there are transmission problems EZD will display th
109. E E TeN EZD operation Contact Make contact Break contact Number Page Operating hours counter value OT x CY OT x CY MED1 04 247 overflow CARRY Send a variable to the network enable FT X Gi PT x GH M 0i 32 248 active Put Pulse width modulation error Ful X El FU X El sea 250 minimum on or off time exceeded Send date and time via the network SC X G4 tC x GH xz i 253 EZ NET function block Timing relay function block TRG TRG REQ1 92 257 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 125 Programming wiring E T N Usable relays and function blocks coils EZD provides various relay types as well as function blocks and their coils for wiring in a circuit diagram Relay function block EZD display Number Coil Parameter Outputs EZD output relays network stations 0 11 08 y only network master Station address 2 to 8 EZD output relay g 11 08 y EZD output relay expansion network 5 11 08 J stations only network master Station address 2 to 8 EZD expansion output relay 5 Di 08 J Bit outputs EH 11 32 J Station address 1 to 8 General coils Markers H Di 16 J COM slave marker iH 11 16 J REMOTE MARKER J ump label Di d2 J Function blocks Analog value comparator function A 11 32 v block Arithmetic function block AR Di d2 y Data block comparator activate BC X EW Di 32 y y Transfer dat
110. Eaton Corporation All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Publication No MN05013005E April 2005
111. EatonElectrical com 357 EZD Settings ENTER FR SWORD E T N A password that has been entered in EZD is transferred to the memory card together with the circuit diagram irrespective of whether it was activated or not If this EZD circuit diagram is loaded back from the memory card the password will also be transferred to EZD and is activated immediately Password setup A password can be set via the System menu regardless of the RUN or STOP modes You cannot change to the System menu if a password is already activated Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu gt Select the menu option SECURITY to enter the password Press the OK button and change over to the PASSWORD menu gt If you press the OK button again you will access the password input If no password has been entered EZD changes directly to the password display and displays six dashes No password available Press OK six zeros will appear Set the password using the cursor buttons lt gt Select position in password Av Seta value between 0 to 9 358 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N ENTER FASSHORD DO004 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FARAMETERS TIHE OPERATING MODE INTERFACE DELETE FUNCT Password protection Save the new password by pressing OK Use OK to exit the password display and proceed with ESC and v to the RANGE menu The scope
112. Example NT3 flashes on station 3 The inputs and outputs 31 3R 3Q and 3S cannot be displayed Ifthe NT3 display is not flashing the inputs and outputs are shown MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 101 Commissioning E T N Configuring the interface for the COM LINK mode If you wish to set up point to point communication with another station this can be done using either the serial interface or EZ NET The EZD must be provided with a display and operating unit The connection must be configured for this purpose Page 348 gt Section Introduction to COM LINK Ensure that the other station supports the COM LINK mode Proceed as follows gt Connect both stations together Only use original connection cables The connector marked POW Side must be plugged into an EZD The EZD feeds the interface electronics of the connection line at both ends gt Connect both stations to the power supply Figure 74 Example with both COM stations The EZD is the active station and the second station is the remote Station gt Switch on the power supply at both stations Ensure that the power supply for both stations is switched on The POW LED must light up or flash It is only possible 102 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Configuring the interface for the COM LINK mode to configure the stations which ha
113. Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Date_and_Time_01 Screen 1 Format DD MM YYYY Display in double font size therefore only day and month visible in display Screen 2 Format DD MM YYYY Display in normal font size therefore year display also visible Screen 3 Format DD MM YY HH MM Display in normal font size display of time in hours and minutes Screen 4 Format HH MM Display of hour and minute in double font size 292 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N WED 01 10 03 Invisible via I1 01 10 2003 Screen overview Screen 5 Format WD DD MM YY Display of weekday and date in normal font size Screen 6 Format HH MM Display of hour and minute in single font size Screen 7 Display of different formats possible in one screen Display in normal font size Screen 8 Display invisible if 11 actuated make contact bit logic Example program 2 different display formats with automatic screen change This program is a copy of the program Date and Time 01 except thatthe screen change here is automatic The program consists of eight screens that can be activated in succession via the counter C01 The pulse signals are generated with timing relay T01 This produces the counter values 0 to 9 Counter value 1 activates screen 1 counter value 2 activates screen 2 etc If upper switch value SH 9 the coun
114. For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Creating your first circuit diagram Press the cursor button gt again The cursor will move to the coil field PPress OK EZD inserts the relay coilf 01 The specified coil function T and the output relay 01 are correctand do not have to be changed L 1 Cid E1444 Your first working EZD circuit diagram now looks like this I I1 I rao L 4 cd B 1944 Figure 67 Your first circuit diagram visible area Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram display The SAVE menu appears I I1 I ran Figure 68 SAVE menu visible area Press the OK button The circuit diagram is stored Once you have connected pushbutton actuators 1 and S2 you can test your circuit diagram straight away MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 91 Commissioning PROGRAM FARAHETERS SET CLOCK E T N Testing the circuit diagram gt Switch to the main menu and select the STOP RUN menu option With a tick at RUN or STOP you switch to the RUN or STOP operating modes EZD runs in the mode indicated by the tick Press the OK button EZD will change to RUN mode The mode assigned the tick is always active The Status display shows the current mode and the switching states of the inputs and outputs gt Change t
115. GRAM in the main menu instead of PASSWORD this means that there is no password protection active EZD will display the password entry field Set the password using the cursor buttons gt Confirm with OK If the password is correct EZD will return automatically to the Status display The PROGRAM menu option is now accessible so that you can edit your circuit diagram The System menu is also accessible MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 361 EZD Settings ACTIVATE Pi ENTER FAS SWORD Se Cak a i ie key ENTER FAD SWORD 00005 ENTER FA SWORD E T N Changing or deleting the password range Unlock EZD Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu Open the password menu via the menu option SECURITY and PASSWORD The CHANGE PW entry will flash EZD will only show this password menu if a password is present Press OK to enter the password entry menu Use OK to move to the 6 digit entry field gt The current password will be displayed gt Modify the six password digits using the cursor buttons gt Confirm with OK Use ESC to exit the security area Deleting Use number combination 000000 to delete a password Ifa password has not been entered already EZD will show six dashes 362 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Password protection Password incorrect or no longer known I
116. HO01 to CH04 for use The high speed frequency counters are hardwired to the digital inputs 11 to 14 These counter relays allow you to countevents independently of the cycle time Y ou can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value To specify a start value for example counting from the value 1989 this can be implemented using a CH counter The CH counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter frequency and pulse shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 Wiring of a counter The following assignment of the digital inputs apply e 1 counter input for the counter CHO1 2 counter input for the counter CH02 13 counter input for the counter CH03 e 14 counter input for the counter CH04 To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CF CH Cl counters only once You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 197 Programming wiring CHI SH PSL yeu BM E T N CHIEH CHIRE CHDIDL CHDISE ani ade O03 M 14 Figure 104 EZD circuit diagram with high speed counter Parameter display and parameter se
117. I Number of bytes MO 10 Source range Value of source Destination Value of marker range range destination decimal marker range decimal B10 42 B20 42 B11 27 B21 27 B12 179 B22 179 B13 205 B23 205 B14 253 B24 253 B15 17 B25 17 B16 4 B26 4 B17 41 B27 41 B18 11 B28 11 B19 193 B29 193 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the content of MB10 to MB19 is copied to the marker bytes MB20 to MB29 Example Copying of marker blocks definition of a marker range with offset The content of marker bytes MB15 to MB18 is to be copied to marker bytes MB65 to MB68 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 179 Programming wiring E T N Parameters of BT01 function block Source range DIY MES Destination range I2 E4 Number of bytes MO 4 Marker MBO1 1 Destination range Constant 64 Marker MBO1 plus Offset 1 64 65 gt MB65 Source range Value of source Destination Value of marker range range destination decimal marker range decimal MB15 68 MB65 68 MB16 189 MB66 189 MB17 203 MB67 203 MB18 3 MB68 3 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the content of MB15 to MB18 is copied to the marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Example Copying of marker blocks definition of a marker range in a different format The value of marker byte M D60 to MD62 is to be copied to MW40 to MW45 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range Ii MOED Destination range 12 MW
118. ID controllers scale arithmetic values output manipulated variables as pulse width modulated signals run arithmetic functions add subtract multiply divide MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 13 EZD E T N track the flow of current in the circuit diagram load save and password protect circuit diagrams If you prefer to wire up EZD from a PC then use EZSoft EZSoft allows you to create and test your circuit diagram on the PC All display and operator functions on the EZD device are created exclusively using the E ZSoft software EZSoft is also used to print out your circuit diagram in DIN ANSI or EZ format Device overview EZD devices ata glance Display and operating unit Dr D d LY a Figure 1 Overview of the display and operating unit DEL button Graphic display ALT button LEDs for signalling ode button Right down cursor buttons OK button Left up cursor buttons ESC button S GPA9 02OHBHHO 14 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Device overview Power supply and CPU ooo Figure 2 Device overview of power supply and CPU Power supply EZ NET terminals EZ LINK terminal Interface for memory card PC and point to point connection Power supply op
119. NU LANGUAGE to change the menu language The language selection for the first entry ENGLISH is displayed Use or v to select the new menu language e g Italian ITALIANO gt Confirm with OK ITALIANO is assigned a tick P Exit the menu with ESC 364 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N SICUREZZA SISTEMA CONFIGURATORE Changing parameters EZD will now show the new menu language Press ESC to return to the Status display Changing parameters EZD allows you to change function relay parameters such as timing relay setpoint values and counter setpoints without having to call up the circuit diagram This is possible regardless of whether EZD is running a program oris in STOP mode Press OK to switch to the main menu gt Start the parameter display by selecting PARAMETERS All function blocks are displayed as a list The following preconditions must be fulfilled in order for a parameter set to be displayed e A function relay must have been included in the circuit diagram e The PARAMETERS menu must be available The parameter set must have been enabled for access indicated by the character at the bottom right of the display Parameter sets can only be enabled or protected via the FUNCTION RELAYS menu or via the circuit diagram with the enable and with inhibit parameter set characters MN05013005E
120. O Function blocks Data block comparator EZD provides 32 function blocks BC 01 to BC32 for comparing values of two consistent marker ranges The comparison is in byte format The following marker types can be compared MB MW MD The function block is enabled in the circuit diagram I I BC21EN Figure 98 EZD circuit diagram with enabling of data block comparator function block Parameter display and parameter set for a data block comparator EC27 Data block comparator function block number 27 Appears in the parameter display tli Start of comparison range 1 a Start of comparison range 2 NO Number of elements to be compared in bytes per range Value range 1 to 383 Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block According to the operands at the inputs I and I z the following operating modes are possible Inputs The function block inputs It I2 and N can have the following operands MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 165 Programming wiring E T N Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 IAQ1 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Specifying the marker range without offset If MB MW or MD markers are specified atboth I d and I
121. P Di D1 Figure 84 15 switches over to the cursor buttons The P buttons are only detected as switches in the Status menu 144 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N 112345610 Pa MO 14 55 G 2 b B RUN Working with contacts and relays The Status menu display shows whether the P buttons are used in the circuit diagram Displayed on the Status display P button function wired and active e P2 button function wired active and P2 button pressed P button function wired and not active e Empty field P buttons not used Checking the circuit diagram EZD contains a built in measuring device enabling you to monitor the switching states of contacts relays and function block coils during operation gt Create the small parallel circuit below and save it I 7 SaN 1 n Figure 85 Parallel circuit Switch EZD to RUN mode via the main menu Return to the circuit diagram display You are now unable to edit the circuit diagram If you switch to the circuit diagram display and are unable to modify a circuit diagram first check whether EZD is in STOP mode The circuit diagram display performs two functions depending on the mode e STOP Creation of the circuit diagram RUN Power flow display Switch on 13 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 145 Programmi
122. SSSESSEEE inputs Function block outputs Gi BESEEEEEEEE Function block inputs Variable operand for outputs Figure 88 Function block display during editing Editing function blocks Go to the FUNCTION RELAYS menu BP ress the OK button The following display appears if no function blocks are present L 001 B 1848 The cursor flashes Press the OK button MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 147 Programming wiring ARTI L001 E 1988 ARTI ACD CFil T if tx L Oi E b4H8 TH x Mea eli 20 30 tI g MONG L O0i E 1808 E T N The editor for inputting a function block is displayed Select the desired function block and number with the lt gt cursor buttons The functions of the individual function blocks are explained in the individual function block descriptions on the following pages This display appears if there are function blocks present The function blocks are created in the sequence in which they were edited Calling up function blocks from the circuit diagram If you enter a function block parameter from the circuit diagram you will jump from the circuit diagram editor to the function block editor automatically Once you have assigned the parameters you will return to the position where you left the circuit diagram with Save or Cancel The operation is carried out in the sam
123. Switching state of an associated contact until the next cycle Starts Always wire forward or from top to bottom Never work backwards Example self latching with own contact Start condition Inputs I1 and 12 are switched on Q1 is switched off This is the circuit diagram of a self latching circuit If 11 and 12 are closed the switching state of relay coil 1 is latched via contact O14 Ist cycle Inputs 11 and I2 are switched on Coil Q1 picks up Contact 01 remains switched off since EZD evaluates from left to right The first coil field was already passed when EZD refreshes the output image in the 6th segment 2nd cycle The self latching now becomes active EZD has transferred the coil states at the end of the first cycle to contact 01 Example Do not wire backwards This example is shown in Section Creating and modifying connections Page 139 It was used here to illustrate how NOT to do it In the third rung EZD finds a connection to the second rung in which the first contact field is empty The output relay is not switched 388 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD Program cycle When wiring more than four contacts in series use one of the marker relays I Di D4 7 03 1 05 H M I D 1 D4 H 1i ra Figure 188 Circuit diagram with M 01 marker relay How EZD evaluates the high speed counters CF CH and Cl
124. T N Function blocks Time range Parameter Time range and setpoint time Resolution 5 000 000 Seconds 0 005 to 999 995 s forconstants and 5 ms variable values H S 00 00 Minutes Seconds 00 00 to 99 59 only for Is constants and variable values H M 00 00 Hours Minutes 00 00 to 99 59 only for 1 min constants and variable values gt Minimum time setting 0 005 s 5 ms If a time value is less than the EZD cycle time the elapsed time will only be recognized in the next cycle Inputs The function block inputs I 4 and 12 can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 7 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Outputs Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 259 Programming wiring E T N Variable setpoint values Behavior of the setpoint value when variable values are used Variable values can be used Variable values must be transferred using operands With the time base s the value is accepted as a value in ms The last position is rounded up to a zero or five With the time base M S the value is accepted as a value ins With the time base H M the value i
125. T SETTING The EZD devices are equipped with a real time clock with date and time functions The time switch function block can be used to implement time switch applications If the clock has not yet been set or if EZD is switched on after the buffer time has elapsed the clock starts with the setting WE 1 00 01 05 2002 The EZD clock operates with date and time so the hour minute day month and year mustall be set The time such as 1 00 indicates the version of the device operating system gt Select SET CLOCK from the main menu This will open the menu for setting the time gt Select SET CLOCK Set the values for day time month and year i i ca 1 gt P ress the OK button to access the Entry mode eae lt gt Move between the parameters YEAR TEE Av Change the value OK Save day and time ESC Retain previous setting Press ESC to leave the time setting display MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 367 EZD Settings E T N Changing between winter The EZD models are fitted with a real time clock The clock summer time DST has various possibilities for changing the DST setting These are subject to different legal requirements in the EU GB and USA _ gt The time change algorithm only applies to the northern hemisphere NONE no daylight saving time setting MANUAL a user defined date for the DST change EU date defined by the Eu
126. The height of the element frame depends on the font size used Three sizes are possible Normal font Double font and Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the screen element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient Space available underneath the element The maximum width of the elementis limited and depends on the font size This also determines the display format MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 291 Visualization with EZD E T N Date formats tab Select the language and one of the four formats available in the Date formats tab These are independent of the language set on the EZD device Visibility tab The visibility tab provides the option of making the screen element invisible by means of an associated variable Example program 1 different display formats and invisibility option for a screen The program consists of eight screens that can be selected via the Cursor buttons and v The screen change is defined in the Button editor Section Button editor Page 331 The language setting for all eight screens is English The first six Screens show various data and time display formats The seventh screen shows all four formats at the same time and the eighth screen illustrates the invisibility function Examples
127. The input contacts are assigned the operand designations R1 to R12 R15 and R16 are the group fault inputs of the transistor expansion unit gt Section Monitoring of short circuit overload with EZ D T Page 393 The outputs are processed as relay coils or contacts like the outputs in the basic unit The output relays are S1 to S8 EZ618 RE provides the outputs S1 to S6 The other outputs S7 S8 can be used internally How is an expansion unit recognized IfatleastoneR contactor coil contactis used in the circuit diagram the basic unitassumes that an expansion unit is connected MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 395 Inside EZD E T N Transfer behavior The input and output data of the expansion units is transferred serially in both directions Take into account the modified reaction times of the inputs and outputs of the expansion units Input and output reaction times of expansion units The debounce setting has no effect on the expansion unit Transfer times for input and output signals e Local expansion Time for inputs R1 to R12 30 ms 1 cycle Time for outputs S1 to S6 S8 15 ms 1 cycle Decentralized expansion Time for inputs R1 to R12 80 ms 1 cycle Time for outputs S1 to S6 S8 40 ms 1 cycle Function monitoring of expansion units If the power supply of the expansion unit is not present no connection can be established between i
128. V voltage Terminal 0 V 0 V voltage Terminals 11 to 112 R1 to R12 Actuation via 24 V 230 V AC version Terminal L Phase conductor L Terminal N Neutral conductor N Terminals R1 to R12 Actuation via phase conductor L If you have already integrated devices into a system secure any parts of the system connected to the working area to prevent access and ensure that no one can be injured if for example motors start up unexpectedly Setting the menu language DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ESPANOL When you switch on EZD for the first time you will be asked to select the menu language gt Use the cursor buttons or v to select the language required English German French Spanish Italian Portuguese Dutch Swedish Polish Turkish MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 83 Commissioning E T N gt P ress OK to confirm your choice and press ESC to exit the menu EZ will then switch to the Status display You can change the language setting at a later time if you wish see Section Changing the menu language Page 364 If you do not set the language EZD will display this menu every time you switch on and wait for you to select a language EZD operating modes A EZD operating modes RUN STOP and TERMINAL MODE In RUN mode the EZD continuously processes a stored program until you select STOP disconnect the power suppl
129. Visualization with EZD E T N Switch val Q1 0K Act val 100 99 gt Move to the required position using the Cursor buttons lt and gt change the value with the Cursor buttons and v gt Accept the modified value by pressing OK Press ESC if you wish to retain the previous value In both cases you return to Selection mode and can exit by pressing ESC The circuit diagram contains timing relay T01 which triggers counter C02 When the counter reaches the upper switch threshold SH it switches output Q1 to 1 The value of the counter s function block output QV is transferred to marker word MW06 The upper setpoint SH is associated with marker word MW07 and the preset actual value SV with marker word MW05 In RUN mode the marker words are where the actual data is stored and where new data is written via the value entry elements The counter can be reset at any time via input 12 11 rising edge is used to accept the value in marker word MWO05 as a new preset actual value SV As there is no setpoint value in marker word MW07 switch value for Q1 when the program is started this is interpreted as switch value Zero and output Q1 is switched immediately to 1 Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Value Entry Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the value entry option using the set variable marker word MW07 switch value for Q1 The value entry element is enlarged
130. _ trigger coil of the transfer data block function block Memory requirement of the transfer data block function block The transfer data block function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block inputs Function of the transfer data block function block The transfer data block comparator function block has two operating modes No data blocks are initialized or copied if an error occurs Initializing INI marker ranges There is one source range and one destination range The source range is specified at I 1 The length of the source range is one byte The destination range is specified at I F The length of the destination range is specified by the number of bytes at the MI input The content of the source range is transferred to the marker bytes in the destination range The function block executes the transfer if there is a rising edge from 0 to 1 atthe BT T_ Trigger coil 174 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the trigger Example Initializing marker blocks specifying marker ranges directly The value of marker byte 10 is to be transferred to marker bytes 20 to 29 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range It MEd Destination range I2 MERI Number of bytes MO 10 Source range Value ofsource Destination Val
131. a block trigger coil ET X T li Ji J y Boolean operation BY 11 32 v Counter function block counterinput E X C MED1 92 y v 126 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN EZD operation Relay function block EZD display Number Coil Parameter Counter function block direction cx Do x 01 3J2 y s Counter function block set counter Cx SE x 01 J2 Jv WA value P reset Counter function block resetcounter X RE x 01 J2 Jv WA value Frequency counter function block CF X EN x 01 04 Jv WA activate counter enable High speed counter function block CH D x 01 04 J J direction High speed counter function block CH X EN x 01 04 J J activate counter enable High speed counter function block set CH SE x 01 04 J J counter value Preset High speed counter function block CH X RE x 01 04 J J reset counter value Incremental encoder counter function CI SE Keli O2 Jv WA block set counter value Preset Incremental encoder counter function CI EN Keli O2 Jv J block activate counter enable Incremental encoder counter function CI RE Keli O2 Jv WA block reset counter value Comparator function block CF Keli dz WA Activate text output function block D x EN x 01 32 J J enable Data function block trigger coil DE X T x 01 J2 Jv WA PID controller activate DC X EW x 01 3J2 Jv J PID controller activ
132. a power supply The POW LED must light up or flash It is only possible to configure the stations which have an active power supply Proceed to the first physical station Location 1 This Station has the termination resistor inserted on socket 1 96 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Configuring an EZ NET network gt The following tasks are only possible in STOP mode Entering the network station number Simultaneously press the DEL and ALT buttons while EZ shows the Status display SECURITY The System menu appears SYSTEM HENU LANGUAGE Select the CONFIGURATOR menu option CONFIGURATOR pPress the OK button NET The NET menu appears COM CINK gt P ress the OK button i The NET PARAMETERS menu appears PARAMETERS STATIONS gt P ress the OK button CONFIGURE ere Press the OK button and select the station number with BRUDRATE ence and v In this case the station number NET ID 01 BUSDELAY 00 pagel F Press the OK button REMOTE RUH REMOTE 10 ie P Exit the NET PARAMETERS menu with ESC BAUDRATE 125KE BUSDELAY 00 SEND 10 i REMOTE RUH REMOTE 10 _ gt The station designated station number 1 is the active Station For this reason the REMOTE RUN and REMOTE 10 functions are not available MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 97 Commissioning E T N Entering network stations Only t
133. abled are On delay for 1 to 14 0 025 ms 15 to 112 0 25 ms Off delay for 1 to 14 0 025 ms 15 16 and 19 to 110 0 4 ms 17 18 111 and 112 0 2 ms gt Ensure that input signals are noise free if the input debounce is disabled EZD will even react to very short signals 392 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Monitoring of short circuit overload with EZ D T Monitoring of short circuit overload with EZ D T Depending on the type of EZ in use itis possible to use the internal inputs 116 R15 and R16 to monitor for short circuits or overloads on an output EZD 116 Group fault signal for outputs Q1 to Q4 EZ620 D TE R16 Group fault signal for outputs S1 to S4 R16 Group fault signal for outputs S5 to S8 State Outputs 116 R15 or R16 No fault found 0 switched off make contact Atleastone outputhasa 1 switched on make contact fault 116 can only be edited with EZD versions which have transistor outputs The following examples are for 116 Q1 to Q4 Example 1 Selecting an output with fault indication Figure 192 Circuit diagram for fault output via 116 The above circuit diagram functions as follows If a transistor output reports a fault M16 is set by 116 The break contact of M16 switches off output Q1 M16 can be cleared by resetting the EZD power supply Example 2 Output of operating state
134. ached undershot 11 contact make contact C1 ZE actual value equal to zero 12 contact make contact Cl CY value range exceeded or undershot Range A The counter counts upwards The value leaves the lower threshold value and reaches the upper value Range B The count direction changes to a downward count The contacts switch in accordance with the actual value e Range C The enable signal is set to 0 The actual value becomes 0 Range D The rising edge on the accept preset value coil sets the actual value to the preset value Range E The reset pulse sets the actual value to zero Range F The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the direction of the values positive or negative Comparators Comparator function blocks allow you to compare constants and variables with one another The following comparisons are possible tt Greater than Ie Equalto Less than 208 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N CFI I Ig Function blocks Ce ee San Piet et er CF42q7 li F Figure 108 EZD circuit diagram with comparator Parameter display and parameter set for the comparator function block CFl2 Function block analog value comparator number 02 Appears in the parameter display ht Comparison value 1
135. age texts are activated via counter values 1 and 4 A default text default has also been defined e Status value 1 Error message text e Status value 2 and 3 default as default text e Status value 4 RESTART message text If the status value of C01 is 1 the message error flashes as the function block parameter FB has been set in the Display change area in the Display change tab The function block parameter switches if the SL value lower switch threshold of the counter is reached gt EZSoft function block editor counter C01 Error default RESTART Figure 179 Message text with default text 328 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Example program 5 several message texts in one text element The program consists of three screens that you can select via the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 The purpose of this program is to display several messages in one message text element The Visibility and Display change tabs are also covered The clock pulse T01 activates counter C01 This counts up to 7 and then resets itself automatically This therefore produces a continuous loop that activates the individual messages Examples Folder F iles can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Message Text_05
136. al value QV gt 9 244 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks The highest binary value represented in BCD is 1001 9 Allother higher binary values from 1010 to 1111 are output as 9 This behavior is correct as BCD encoders normally don t generate these values Example 3 Input value gt l1 19dec Binary value 00010011 Decimal value QV gt 13 Example 4 Input value gt l1 161061273qec Binary value 1001100110011001100110011001 Decimal value QV gt 9999999 Example 5 Input value gt l1 61 673dec Binary value 100000000000 00001111000011101001 Decimal value QV gt 9099 Bit 32 is the sign bit Bit32 1 Sign Minus Example 6 Input value gt l1 2147483647 dec Binary value 01111111111111111111111111111111 Decimal value QV gt 9999999 Values greater than 161061273 are output as 9999999 Values less than 161061273 are output as 9999 999 The working range of the function block has been exceeded BIN mode The decimal value is assigned to input I 1 The decimal value is represented as a BCD coded value The BCD coded value is interpreted as a hexadecimal value and output as a decimal value at output QV gt MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 245 Programming wiring E T N Example 1 Input value gt I1 7 gec BCD binary value 0111 Hexadecimal value 0111 Decimal value QV gt 7 Example 2
137. allows two different operations to be set e Sequence 1 Switch on Motor 1 immediately e Sequence 2 Switch on Guard 2 Wait time then switch on Motor 1 Contacts and relays used e 1 Sequence 1 2 Sequence 2 3 Guard 2 moved out e 12 Motor protective circuit breaker switched on Q1 Motor 1 Q2 Guard 2 T D1 Waittime 30 00 s on delayed O T Text motor protective circuit breaker tripped MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 239 E T N Programming wiring Circuit diagram Power flow display 01 selected I fi Di I Qiess se f I O2 12 I O T li Ot Se eee Q ssemmmmeel oO Range from jump label 1 processed k g Oe D2 Jump to labels DQ ssssmmmmf A Range to jump label 8 skipped 9 i CG D2 Qgesseenne ff I I 13 T T f2 det ah 08 J ump label 8 circuit diagram processed iS T amp liT esSeesess DE from this point on HE 1E I if O 04 Iiz c OTi Master reset The master reset function block allows you to reset the state of the markers and all outputs to the 0 state with a single command Depending on the operating mode of this function block itis possible to reset the outputs only or the markers only or both 32 function blocks are available ete I MRLET Figure 124 EZD circuit diagram with master reset functio
138. and Q1 with a make contact bit logic so that the bit display element takes on the state of the output Q1 on off The bit display is made invisible via the Boolean operand Q3 A make contact bit logic is also used here so that invisibility is activated for as long as Q3 in the On state When the Reset pulse is present only the frame of the bitmap is visible state of the bitmap is off bitmap is visible The display is overlaid partly with static text Bits Bits invisible invisible with Q3 on with Q3 on Figure 151 Bit display visible invisible Screen 4 Screen 4 illustrates the activation of the bit display negated with overlaid static text exclusively via the associated variable This screen contains four bit display elements These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A break contact bit logic is selected here The bit display is overlaid partly with static texts MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 289 Visualization with EZD E T N Break bit Log Break bit Logic o1 02 03 Figure 152 Break contact logic bit display with overlaid text Screen 5 Screen 5 illustrates the possible uses of the Visibility tab for the bit display negated with overlaid static text In this screen a bit display element has been enlarged to the full size of the screen This is activated via the Boolean operand Q1 wit
139. and v to move to the LIGHTING CONTRAST i menu LIGHTING CE Press the OK button Use cursor buttons and v to change the value in 25 CONTRAST 1 steps LIGHTING 155 Set the required backlighting The backlight will immediately change to the set value 0 25 50 75 and 100 are possible values CONTRAST i MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 377 EZD Settings E T N _ EZD comes with the following factory setting The contrast is set to 0 The backlight is set to 75 Retention Itis a requirement of system and machine controllers for Operating states or actual values to have retentive settings What this means is that the values will be retained safely even after the supply voltage to a machine or system has been switched off and are also retained until the nexttime the actual value is overwritten The following operands and function blocks can be set to operate retentively Markers Counter function blocks Data function blocks and Timing relays Operating hours counter EZD provides four retentive operating hours counters They are always retentive and can only be selectively deleted with a reset command Retentive data volume 200 bytes is the maximum memory range for retentive data operating hours counters are not included Markers A user definable and consistent marker range can be declared as retentive Counters All C CH and CI function blocks ca
140. ars in the parameter display SH Upper setpoint REL Lower setpoint Poy Defined actual value Preset GS Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change setpoint values and or the preset value and the enabling of the parameter display Value range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147483 647 Behavior when value range is exceeded The function block sets the switching contact CY to the Status 1 and retains the value of the last valid operation The counter C counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact C CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 187 Programming wiring E T N Inputs The function block inputs H SL and 54 can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 IAQ1 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Contacts e C O1OF to C 320F Actual value upper setpoint C O1FB to C 32FB Ac
141. ate P component OC EF MED1 92 J J PID controller activate component DC x El x 01 32 J J PID controller activate D component Of ED x 01 32 J J PID controller accept manual DC X SE x 01 32 y J manipulated variable Activate signal smoothing filter FT EM x 01 32 J J MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 127 Programming wiring E T N Relay function block EZD display Number Coil Parameter Get from network station function aT MEDi 42 Jv block Seven day time switch Hl MED y Year time switch function block HY MeDi d2 y Activate value scaling function block LS X EH xz 01 32 y v Master reset function block MF OX T Medi d2 J Jv Activate numerical converter function HC xX EN Keli Jg J Jv block Function block operating hours OT X EN Medd 04 J Jv counter enable Operating hours counter function OT X RE x 01 04 J Jv block reset Send to the network EZ NET FT X T x 01 32 J J function block trigger Activate pulse width modulation Ful x EH x 01 02 J Jv function block Send time to the network EZ NET BIE eS Ta zii J function block trigger Activate set cycle time function block ST X EN REM Timing relay function block T X EH MED1 92 y v trigger control coil enable Timing relay function block stop yk Sy MEDi d2 J Jv Timing relay function block reset T X RE x 01 J2 J Jv Activate value limitation function block WC EN
142. ation visit www EatonE lectrical com 181 Programming wiring _ E T N The transfer is in byte format MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes 18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length The error message Number of elements exceeds the destination range is output BTOLE1 is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks range overlap error 12 bytes are to be copied starting from MW60 MW64 is Specified as destination address Parameters of BT01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MWh Comparison range 2 T2 MWb4 Number of bytes MO 2 The copy operation is in byte format MW60 to MW64 is 8 bytes The number of bytes is 12 bytes The error message Both ranges overlap is output BCO1E2 is 1 Example Copying of marker bytes invalid offset error The value of marker word MW40 is to be copied to MW54 and subsequent marker words The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BT01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MW40 Comparison range 2 I2 M54 Number of bytes HMO C HEN The value of C 01QV is 10042 This value is too big The value at MO can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the destination range is outside of the permissible range is output BTO1E3 is 1 182 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EVET AND I tT BM Function blocks Boolean operation EZD provides 32 func
143. ay The mask contains two message text elements These are activated via the outputs Q1 and Q3 and appear in the display The texts are only displayed if the corresponding outputs are 1 No message is assigned to output status 0 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 321 Visualization with EZD E T N Screen 3 Screen 3 illustrates the control of an enlarged message text element containing two message texts that are assigned to the two states of output Q2 Q2 0 gt Message text Q2 OFF Q2 1 gt Message text Q2 ON Q2 OFF Q2 ON Figure 173 Message texts using an associated variable Screen 4 Screen 4 is basically the same as screen 3 except that it also includes the Visibility element The message text can be made invisible via input11 The setting for this was made in the Visibility tab Make contact bit logic is selected With break contact bit logic the message text element is made visible when actuating 11 1 not actuated 1 actuated invisible Invisible via I1 via I1 Q2 ON Figure 174 Hiding a message text 322 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Screen overview Screen 5 Screen 5 is basically the same as screen 4 except that the Invisible function has been replaced with Flash as the Display change function When input 12 1 make contact bit logic the message text can be made to flash
144. baud rate that your connection will support Baud rate selection Select 19200 baud as the baud rate Badly laid cables may give rise to electromagnetic interference Select 9600 baud as the baud rate If this is not satisfactory the connection cable must be laid in a different location gt P ress the OK button Select 19200 baud as the baud rate Press the or v button gt P ress the OK button Switch on the COM connection The COM LINK must only be switched atthe active station Two devices with COM LINK Switched on cannot communicate with each other Press the v button Press the OK button The tick on the COM LINK menu item indicates that COM LINK has been selected No tick means that COM LINK has not been selected The following applies to the active station If you wish to run data transfers between the two devices in both directions you must select the marker range on the active station Select the REMOTE MARKER menu item The following selection will only be displayed if the COM LINK menu item has been ticked For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Configuring the interface for the COM LINK mode READ MOM iMDO0 WRITE iMDOO 1MDO0 READ HDD iMD0O WRITE HOOD iMD00 Press the OK button The data is physically located in the second station i e the remote station The active station reads and write
145. be found in the Chapter EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial Connection Page 333 Accessories Connection plug 8 pole RJ 45 EZ NT RJ 45 Connection assignment of the RJ 45 socket on the device 1 Noun BWN 8 Figure 55 RJ 45 socket Connection cable 4 wire twisted pair gt chapter Technical data Page 426 m GED Ce ae A 2 ECANL XX B 3 GND Ground B 4 SELIN Figure 56 Connection assignment ECAN_H data cable pin 1 cable pair A ECAN_L data cable pin 2 cable pair A Ground cable GND pin 3 cable pair B Select cable SEL_IN pin 4 cable pair B Minimum operation with EZ NET functions with the cables ECAN_H ECAN_L and GND The SEL_IN cable is only used for automatic addressing MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 71 Installation E T N Table5 Prefabricated cables RJ 45 plug on both ends Cable length Type designation cm 30 EZ NT 30 80 EZ NT 80 150 EZ NT 150 Material for self manufactured cables 100 m4 x 0 18 mm2 EZ NT CAB Bus termination resistor The first and last stations in the network mustbe provided with a bus termination resistor Value 124 Q Termination connector EZ NT R Cable length and cross sections For correct operation of the network the cable lengths cross sections and cable resistances must correspond to the following table Cable length Cable resistance Cross section m mQ m mm2 AWG up to 40 140 0 13 26 up to 17
146. be set on devices with a display using the buttons on the EZD All the EZ NET settings are best carried out on station 1 The entire network can be configured via station 1 The configuration should only be carried out locally when a device is replaced Valid station numbers for operation are 01 to 08 Station number 00 factory default setting With station number 00 double address assignment cannot occur when an existing device is being exchanged Transmission speed The EZD device hardware allows you set transmission speeds between 10 and 1000 Kbaud in specific stages The length of all cables determines the maximum permissible data transfer rate gt chapter Technical data Page 426 The data transfer rate is set under the BAUDRATE menu item Possible baud rates are 10 20 50 125 250 500 and 1000 kB 125 kB factory default setting MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 339 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Pause time changing the write repetition rate manually Every EZ NET network connection automatically determines the number of stations which are active on the network the baud rate which is used and the total number of bytes which are transmitted The minimum pause time which a device requires is automatically determined using this data in order to ensure that all devices can send their messages If a pause time is to be increased the value of the BUSDELAY must
147. bit r The following rules apply if you want to use selective binary operands contacts from the markers MD MW MB Table 9 Composition of the markers Applies to Left most Right least MD MW significant bit byte significant bit byte MB M word word 32 bit MD1 16 bit MW2 MW1 8 bit MB4 MB3 MB2 MB1 1 bit M32 to M25 M24 to M17 M16 to M9 M8 to M1 32 bit MD2 16 bit MW4 MW3 8 bit MB8 MB7 MB6 MB5 1 bit M64 to M57 M56 to M49 M48 to M41 M40 to M33 32 bit MD3 16 bit MW6 MW5 8 bit MB12 MB11 MB10 MB9 1 bit M96 to M89 M88 to M81 M80 to M73 M72 to M65 32 bit MD4 130 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN EZD operation Applies to Left most Right least MD MW significant bit byte significant bit byte MB M word word 16bit MW8 MW7 8 bit MB16 MB15 MB14 MB13 32 bit MD5 16 bit MW10 MW9 8 bit MB20 MB19 MB18 MB17 32 bit D23 16 bit W46 W45 8 bit B92 MB91 B90 MB89 32 bit D24 16 bit W48 W47 8 bit B96 MB95 B94 MB93 32 bit D25 16 bit w50 W49 32 bit D26 16 bit w52 w51 32 bit D48 16 bit w96 MW95 32 bit D49 32 bit D50 32 bit D95 32 bit D96 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 131 Programming wiring E T N _ You should only write the markers once Marker double words always contain all data formats When several
148. bove topology is a combination of EZ NET operation and serial interface operation Bear in mind the access rights of the individual devices in EZ NET and in the corresponding serial interface Figure 78 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 111 Commissioning E T N Caution Data collision In order to ensure proper operation the following conditions must be observed The following applies If there is more than one EZD device in Terminal mode each EZD device must access a different EZ NET station A device running in Terminal mode must not access any two devices communicating with each other in Terminal mode Ifa PC with EZSoftor an EZD device with a serial interface is in active communication with an EZ NET station this Station must not be accessed at the same time in Terminal mode via the EZ NET Proceed as follows Your EZ NET or your Serial interface must be running correctly Press the OK button from the Status Display The first menu will appear STOP J RUN PARAMETERS Press the button SET CLOCK STOP J PUN 4 This will display the TERMINAL MODE menu item PARAMETERS SET CLOCK gt P ress the OK button TERMINAL MODE The START MODE menu item will flash START MODE Press the button STATION ID i 112 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N STATION ID D START MODE
149. ce Example 1 Example 2 unit line 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 8 T 5 5 zz 6 6 ae 6 7 6 8 8 5 at E1 i Example 1 physical location is the same as the station number e Example 2 physical location is not the same as the station number apart from location 1 being the same as station 1 Physical location 1 is always assigned as station 1 Station 1 is the only station which must be present MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 335 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Position and addressing of the operands via EZ NET Stations Basic unit Local expansion Network bit data Network word data Input Output Input Output Input Output Receive Send l Q R S RN SN 1 111to16 1Q1 1R1 1S1to8 2to8RN 2to8 GT1to32 PT1 to 8 to 16 1 to 32 SN1 to 32 to 32 2 211to16 2Q1 2R1 2S1to8 1 3t08 1 3t08 GT1to32 PT1 to 8 to 16 RN1 SN 1 to 32 to 32 to 32 3 311tol16 3Q1 3R1 3S1to8 1 2 4to 1 2 4t08 GT1to32 PT1 to 8 to 16 8RN 1to SN1to 32 to 32 32 4 411to16 4Q1 4R1 ASEO onma osato Coo E to 8 to 16 to8RN1 8SN1to to 32 to 32 32 5 511tol6 5Q1 5R1 5S 1to8 1t04 6 1to4 6to GT1to32 PT1 to 8 to 16 to8RN1 8SN1to to 32 to 32 32 6 611to16 6Q1 6R1 OS IO Flos 7 Fos 7 SE Cr lito sam Py i to 8 to 16 8RN1to SN1to 32 to 32 32 7 711to16 7Q1 TR1 7S 1to8 1t06 8 1to6 8 GT1to32 PTl to 8 to 16 RN1 SN 1 to 32 to 32 to 32 8 811to16 8Q1 8R1 8S1to8 lto7RN 1to7 GT1to3
150. cember the time switch will switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd of the month and switch off at 23 59 on the 17th Value scaling EZD provides 32 value scaling function blocks LS01 to LS 32 The function block enables you to convert values from one value range to another one In this way itis possible to reduce or increase values Wiring of a scaling function block You can integrate a value scaling function block into your circuit as a coil H 4 i LSPEN Figure 121 EZD circuit diagram with LS value scaling MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 233 Programming wiring Liz I Xi HH PXE py BM Liz E T N Parameter display and parameter set for the LS function t block LS value scaling function block number 27 Appears in the parameter display S Input value actual value source range PAL Lower value of source range a Lower value of target range Upper value of source range Upper value of target range Output value scaled Inputs The function block inputs 14 281 282 244 andeve can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 IAQ1 terminal I7 1A02 terminal 18 1403 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assign
151. ch as make contacts carry a 1 signal when closed and 0 when open Every contact in the EZD circuit diagram can be defined as either a make contact or a break contact MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 119 Programming wiring E T N Coils Coils are the actuating mechanisms of relays In RUN mode the results of the wiring are sent to the coils which switch on or off accordingly Coils can have seven different coil functions Table 6 Usable contacts Contact EZD display 1 Make contact open in release 1 8 H A position Other contacts gt Table Break contact closed in release 1 8 j position Other contacts gt Table EZD works with different contacts which can be used in any order in the contact fields of the circuit diagram Table 7 Contacts Contact Make contact Break contact Number Page Inputs Inputs of a network station 1 1 Di de 336 Station address 1 to 8 COM slave inputs il il 1 4 EZD input terminal I i Dit Cursor button P F 11 04 Network station expansion input F XR Di d2 336 terminal Station address 1 to 8 Input terminal for expansion unit iR iF Di 42 COM slave Input terminal for expansion unit F Di de Bit inputs via the network RH RH 11 32 336 Station address 1 to 8 120 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E
152. chnical data 407 General 407 CPU real time clock timing relay memory 415 Transistor outputs 422 Analog output 425 EZ NET network 426 List of the function blocks 428 Function blocks 428 Function block coils 429 Function block output operands 432 Other operands 432 Memory requirement 433 Index 435 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 E T N About This Manual This manual describes the installation commissioning and programming circuit diagram generation of the EZD control relay A specialist knowledge of electrical engineering is needed for commissioning and creating circuit diagrams When active components such as motors or pressure cylinders are controlled parts of the system can be damaged and persons put at risk if the EZD device is connected or programmed incorrectly Device designation This manual uses the following abbreviated designations for different device models EZD EZ AC for EZ618 AC RE EZ DC for EZ6 DC E Writing conventions gt e lt Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings gt Indicates actions to be taken Attention Warns of the possibility of light damage Caution Warns of the possibility of serious damage and slight injury Warning Warns of the possibility of substantial damage serious injury or death MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 9 About This Man
153. counter is active EZD counts the hours in minute cycles Des Se OTD1EN Ne OTOIRE OTI1 1 lant Figure 126 EZD circuit diagram with operating hours counter Parameter display and parameter set for the operating hours counter function block T Operating hours counter number 04 Appears in the parameter display HH Upper threshold value in hours Qy Actual value of the operating hours counter Contacts OT01Q1 to OT04Q1 The contact switches when the upper threshold value has been reached greater than or equal to Coils OTOLEN to OTO4EN enable coil OTOLRE to OTO4RE reset coil MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 247 Programming wiring E T N Memory requirement of the operating hours counter The operating hours counter function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the operating hours counter function block If the enable coil OT EN is triggered to the 1 state the counter adds the value 1 to its actual value every minute basic clock rate 1 minute If the actual value on QV gt reaches the setpoint value of gt I1 the contact OT Q1 switches for as long as the actual value is greater than or equal to the setpoint value The actual value is retained in the unit until the Reset coil OT RE is actuated The actual value is then set to zero Operati
154. crewdriver width 3 5 x 0 6 mm Connection cross sections of the EZD cage clamp terminal cables Solid 0 2 to 4 mm AWG 24 12 Flexible with ferrule 0 2 to 2 5 mm2 AWG 24 12 Tool for slot head screws for EZ expansion unit Slot head screwdriver width 3 5 x 0 6mm tightening torque 0 6 Nm 5 3in lb Connection cross sections of screw terminal cables Solid 0 2 to 4 mm AWG 22 12 Flexible with ferrule 0 2 to 2 5 mm2 AWG 22 12 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 47 Installation E TeN Network cables and plugs If possible use the prefabricated EZ NT cables e g 30 or 80 cm Other cable lengths can be made using the EZ NT CAB cable and the EZ NT RJ 45 plug AWG 24 0 2 mm are the largest crimpable cross sections The first and last stations in the network mustbe provided with an EZ NT R bus termination resistor Connecting the power supply The required connection data for EZD are given in the Chapter Technical data Page 407 The EZD devices run a system test for one second after the power supply has been switched on Either RUN or STOP mode will be activated after this time depending on the default setting 48 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the power supply EZD AC power supply Ue 115 230 V 50 60 Hz 85 264V Tp 70 mA 115V Wr 0 6 x 3 5 x 100 pe Se
155. ctivate the Scaling range field and enter 0 as the minimum value and 100 as the maximum value MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 311 Visualization with EZD E T N In order for example to display the value range 0 to 120 of a timing relay in minutes 0 to 2 min enter 0 as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter min as the unit of measure Enter 0 in the activated Scaling range field as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value Programming in EZSoft Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Value entry screen element into the screen gt Position the mouse above the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Three sizes are available Normal font Double font and Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle atthe bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as required by dragging the selection handle on the sides Set variable tab On the Set variable tab you define the Boolean variable you wish to set 312 For more information
156. ctual value of P ID controller 32 768 to 32767 gt KP Proportional gain Kp 0 to 65535 in gt TN Reset time Tn 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt TV Rate time Ty 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt TC Scan time 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt MV Manual manipulated variable 4096 to 4095 QV gt Manipulated variable 0 to 4095 unipolar 4096 to 4095 bipolar Example Value at input Value processed in the function block gt KP Proportional gain Kp 1500 15 gt TN Reset time Ty 250 255 gt TV Rate time Ty 200 20s gt TC Scan time 500 50s gt MV Manual manipulated variable 500 500 Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Contacts DCO1LI to DC32LI value range of the manipulated variable exceeded Coils DCOLEN to DC32EN Enable PID controller DCO1EP to DC32EP Activate proportional component e DCO1EI to DC32E Activate integral component 216 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks DCO1ED to DC32ED Activate the differential component DCOISE to DC32SE Activate the manual manipulated variable Memory requirement of the PID controller The PID controller function block requires 96 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the PID controller function block The PID controller works on the basis of the PID algorithm According to this the manipulated variable Y t is the result of the
157. d EZD sets all station numbers to zero which are assigned a physical location behind the leading zero gt Selectthe required station number with the and cursor buttons and confirm your input with the OK button gt Configure all EZ NET stations again using the CONFIGURATION menu Further information concerning the EZ NET network topic can be found in Chapter EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial Connection Page 333 100 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Wi 9 6 RUH JET eaves Tiga I NTI OC F MO 06 45 J21 9 6 RUH Configuring an EZ NET network Displaying the Status display of other stations On every device with a display you can display the states of the inputs and outputs of each network station gt Change to the Status display and press the ESC button The cursor changes to the display of the network station NT and flashes The station number is displayed in front of the inputs and outputs gt Change to the number of the required station with the and v cursor buttons gt P ress the OK button gt If you want to view the state of the inputs and outputs of a local expansion press the OK button If you press the ESC button again or the OK button the display of the input and output states of the station is terminated The station showing the status on its display cannot read its own data from the network
158. d their respective constants Space requirement per Space requirement per circuit conn function block constant on the function block input Byte Byte Rung 20 Function blocks A 68 4 AR 40 4 BC 48 4 BT 48 4 BV 40 4 C 52 4 CF 40 4 CH 52 4 Cl 52 4 CP 32 4 D 160 DC 96 DB 36 4 FT 56 4 GT 28 HW 68 4 per channel HY 68 4 per channel LS 64 4 MR 20 NC 32 4 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 433 Appendix E T N Space requirement per Space requirement per circuit conn function block constant on the function block input Byte Byte OT 36 4 PT 36 4 PW 48 4 SC 20 ST 24 4 T 48 4 VC 40 4 434 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Index Actual ValUCS rr 157 Add RUN Ginamitan a ea ANR 90 Switching CONLACE csscessstessecessessessesseeeeees 89 Break contattata 120 IAVEPING eroris ia 139 Bus termination resistor voces 72 Button ALT ararua na 90 DEL iena aara a ean wenteminnreuas 90 OR PORNE TENE 87 118 BURON S aona a a A Cable CroSS S CtiIONS sccccccrrsiinrsr 72 Cable lengthening 55 72 Cable protection Lsscsscncrenrrrssnnnnssns 52 Circuit diagram Coil function MN05013005E CONTA CIO Nc cessenivecedsaiscoresdsovirinsitamnounieonasters 152 IMpUulS relay eesseesneenes 152 Latching relay sssrin 15
159. direction of the values positive or negative MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 191 Programming wiring E T N High speed counters EZD provides various high speed counter functions These counter function blocks are coupled directly to the digital inputs The high speed counter functions are only available with EZDDC inputs The following functions are possible Frequency counters measure frequencies CF High speed counters count high speed signals CH Incremental encoder counters count two channel incremental encoder signals Ch The high speed digital inputs are 1 to 14 The following wiring rules apply e 1 CF01 or CHO1 or C101 e 12 CF02 or CH02 or C101 13 CF03 or CH03 or C102 14 CF04 or CH04 or C102 Attention Every digital input may only be used once by the CF CH Cl function blocks The incremental encoder requires an input pair Example 1 high speed counter CHO1 2 frequency counter CF 02 13 incremental encoder channel A C102 14 incremental encoder channel B C102 192 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Example function block list in the FUNCTION RELAYS menu CID CFOi CHO i All function blocks access digital input I1 Only CHO1 supplies the correct value Frequency counters EZD provides four frequency counters which are CF01 to CF 04 The frequency cou
160. dows Bitmap format bmp e J PEG format jpg Tiff format tif and Icons ico The formats are converted to monochrome format using Suitable conversion procedures and then saved accordingly in the program The size and position of the bitmap graphic can be modified later in the Mask Editor _ gt Bitmap graphics require a large amount of memory Overlaid bitmaps are also stored fully in the memory The more bitmaps are used use the more the cycle time will be increased considerably due to the additional memory requirement This may possibly lead to program malfunctions e g loss of count pulses Black and white graphics should be used ideally These should be between 16 x 16 and 32 x 32 pixels in size 294 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Programming in EZSoft P Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Bitmap screen element into the mask This will open the Picture File Selection dialog For the optimum display of the graphic file select one of the three conversion processes provided in the Conversion Type area The Preview shows the selected bitmap and the conversion result EZS oft always generates the optimum black and white bitmap graphic for display on the monochrome EZD display You can also support EZS oft by optimizing the graphic file gt Position the mouse above the screen element and move it to the required position with the left
161. e TINVALIO FROG INVALID PROG message This either means that the memory card is empty or that the circuit diagram on the card contains function relays that EZD does not recognize The analog value comparator function block is only available on 24 V DC versions of EZD Programs with visualization components are only supported by the EZD _ If the memory card is password protected the password will also be transferred to the EZD memory and will be active immediately Deleting a circuit diagram on the card gt Select the DELETE CARD menu option Press OK to confirm the prompt and to delete the card DELEIER content Press ESC to cancel Memory card compatibility of the programs _ Memory cards with programs are always read by EZD devices with the newer higher operating system version The program is executable If programs are written with a newer operating system higher number on the memory card this program can only be read and executed by the same version or a higher one MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 403 Inside EZD E TeN EZSoft EZSoft is a PC program for creating testing and managing circuit diagrams for EZD You should only transfer data between the PC and EZD using the EZDPC interface cable which is available as accessory EZ800 PC CAB gt EZD cannot exchange data with the PC while the circuit diagram display is on screen
162. e EZD network connection is equipped with its own CPU Network data can therefore be processed while the program is running After each program cycle the status of the network MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 343 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N data is written to the operand image of the program and the send data is read from the image The program runs through the next cycle with this data Reading and sending the network data from the CPU The network CPU of the station reads every message on the network If the message is relevant to the station it is accepted into a message memory If the content of a send message changes it is sent Transmission only occurs when there is no message on the network EZ NET is configured so that every station can send its messages This means that the station must observe a pause time between sending messages The pause time increases the higher the number of stations and the lower baud rate setting The number of stations is recognized by every station via a sign of life signal _ The following applies to fast message transfer e Set the fastest possible baud rate to suit the network length and cable cross section e Fewer messages means faster messages Avoid program downloads during the RUN mode Signs of life of the individual stations and diagnostics The inputs and outputs message type is used as a sign of life recogn
163. e activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display FE UNBE Screen 2 The second screen contains a message text element with two message texts The message texts are activated via counter values 1 and 2 The first resetting of timing relays T01 to T06 by T06 also activates counter C01 which then reaches the value 1 The Error message text is then displayed This flashes since Flashing was set on the Display change tab and with function block parameter FB counter value lt 1 RESTART is displayed if the counter value of C01 is 2 Error RESTART Figure 178 Message text as status display 326 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Example program 4 activating message texts with a default text The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display This program is an extension of the program Message _Text_03 The extension consists of the display of a default textin screen 2 when the counter takes on values that are not assigned to any messages The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a settime Counter make contacts CO1ZE in the circuit diagram are switc
164. e day and time ESC Retain previous setting Press ESC to leave the display Select the day and time at which summer time is to commence Select the day and time at which summer time is to end The same time for conversion applies as for the legally determined variants EU GB US MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 369 EZD Settings E T N Activating input delay Input signals can be evaluated by EZD with a debounce delay debounce This enables for example the trouble free evaluation of switches and pushbutton actuators subject to contact bounce In many applications however very short input signals have to be monitored In this case the debounce function can be switched off Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu Select the SYSTEM menu If EZD is password protected you cannot open the System menu until you have unlocked it The input delay debounce is set with the DEBOUNCE menu EBOUNCE 4 item F BUTTONS RUM MODE CARD MODE f Activating debounce El ie Ifa tick is set beside DEBOUNCE the input delay is set RUN HODE If this is not so proceed as follows CARD MODE PSelectDEBOQUNCE and press OK Debounce mode will be activated and the display will show DEBOUNCE Jf Press ESC to return to the Status display Deactivating debounce input delay IfEZD is showing DEBOUNICE in the display this means that D
165. e membrane IP65 NEMA Type 4X Type 3R rain tight and Type 12 dust tight Oscillations IEC 60068 2 6 Constant amplitude 0 15 mm Hz 10 to 57 Constant acceleration 2 g Hz 57 to 150 Shocks IEC 60068 2 27 semi sinusoidal 15 g ll ms Shocks 18 Drop IEC 60068 2 31 Drop mm 50 height Free fall when packed IEC 60068 2 32 m 1 412 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Technical data Electrostatic discharge ESD IEC EN 61000 4 2 severity level 3 Air discharge kV 8 Contact discharge kV 6 Electromagnetic fields RFI V m 10 IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radio interference suppression EN 55011 IEC 61000 6 1 2 3 4 B limit class Burst IEC EN 61000 4 4 severity level 3 Power cables kV 2 Signal cables kV 2 High energy pulses Surge EZD kV 0 5 IEC N 61000 4 5 severity level 2 power cable symmetrical Line conducted interference IEC EN 61000 4 6 V 10 Dielectric strength Measurement of the air clearance and creepage distance EN 50178 UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 142 Dielectric strength EN 50178 Overvoltage category degree of pollution 11 2 Tools and cable cross sections Solid minimum to maximum mm 0 2 to 4 AWG 24 to 12 Flexible with ferrule minimum to maximum mm 0 2 to 2 5 AWG 24 to 12 Slot head screwdriver width mm 3 5 x 0 5 inch 0 14 x 0 02 MN05013005E For m
166. e way as with circuit diagram operation Example timing relay function block Function block Timing relay Switch function On delayed with random switching Time range M S Minute S econds Set time gt I1 20 min 30 s Actual time QV gt Copied to MD96 148 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Working with contacts and relays Assigning operands to an gt input of a function block Only the following variables can be assigned to the input of a function block Constants e g 42 e Markers such as MD MW MB Analog output QA e Analog inputs IA All output variables of the function blocks QV gt Assigning operands to a QV gt output of a function block mS Only markers such as MD MW MB or the analog output QA can be assigned to a variable output of a function block Deleting operands on the function block inputs outputs Position the cursor on the required operand TO xt Mis SI BELG Press the DEL button Te Gi MONG The operand is deleted TO xt Mes T1 EE Te aur MOI L 001 BE 1808 Deleting an entire function block ARO ADD T Ensure that all contacts and coils of the function block are CPi deleted T 18 X gt Select the required function block from the list L O0e E 1808 In this case CP 10 Press the DEL button MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 149 Programming wiring
167. e when you press lt gt or OK to leave a contact field or coil field In the contact field to change IQi tol d Hof OK c oo a ca In the coil field to change Tli tosga I De eh Qi Ce 01 ia l 08 N T Hi le vv z T H 13 7 _ OK D 08 gt gt or or OK OK 138 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Working with contacts and relays Deleting contacts and coils gt Move the cursor using the buttons lt gt to a contact or coil field Press DEL The contact or the coil will be deleted together with any connections Changing make contacts to break contacts Every contact in the EZD circuit diagram can be defined as either a make contact or a break contact gt Switch to Entry mode and move the cursor over the contact name Press ALT The make contact will change to a break contact Press OK 2 x to confirm the change Tmn ar 2x amp E Figure 79 Change contact I 13 from make to break Creating and modifying connections Contacts and relay coils are connected with the arrow in the Connect mode EZD displays the cursor in this mode as an arrow gt Use lt gt to move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field from which you wish to create a connection Do not position the cursor on the first contact field At this position the ALT button has a different function Insert rung MN05013005E For m
168. ebounce mode has already been deactivated P Otherwise select DEEOUNCE and press OK Debounce mode will be deactivated and the display will show DEBOUNCE 370 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Activating and deactivating the P buttons How EZD input and output signals are processed internally is explained in Section Delay times for inputs and outputs from Page 390 Activating and deactivating Even though the cursor buttons P buttons have been set as the P buttons pushbutton actuator inputs in the circuit diagram this function is not activated automatically This prevents any unauthorized use of the cursor buttons The P buttons can be activated in the System menu If EZD is password protected you cannot open the System menu until you have unlocked it The P buttons are activated and deactivated via the P BUTTONS menu gt P ress DEL and ALT to call up the System menu a I pselect the SYSTEM menu RU N HODE Move the cursor to the P BUTTONS menu CARO MODE Activating the P buttons DEBOUNCE m a P BUTTONS IfEZD is displaying F BUTTONS this means thatthe RUN HODE P buttons are active CARD MODE DP Otherwise select P BUTTONS and press OK EZD changes the display to F BUTTONS 4 andtheP buttons are activated Press ESC to return to the Status display The P buttons are only active in the Status display and the te
169. ed the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 234 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Value range for inputs and outputs Value range HH Input value of the function 2147483648 to 2147 483647 block Md Lower value of source range Ra Lower value of target range yd Upper value of source range Ya Upper value of target range Qu Output value Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil VCO1EN to VC32EN function block enable Memory requirement of the LS function block The LS function block requires 64 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the function block The scaling function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil LS EN is active If coil LS EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero The function block operates according to the following equation Y2 Y X2xY1 X1xY ee 2 1 SRE X2 X1 X2 X1 Y x Actual output value of target range X Actual input value of source range X Lower value of source range MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 235 Programming wiring E T N X2 Upper value of source range Y Lower value of target range Y2 Upper value of target range x1 x2 O O v1 Y2 Figure 122 Value
170. ements are fully described in the following sections The Project info Program info and Screen info tabs are displayed if there are no screen elements activated The relevant tabs for a particular screen element are shown if it is inserted in the screen Static text Static textis a simple text display thatis shown as soon as the screen is active Up to 16 normal font size characters can fit in one text field and up to 4 textlines can be arranged in rows The number of characters per text field and the number of displayable lines is halved if double font characters are used The Static text is assigned to a language in the Language selection field The languages available are defined in the Screen overview Programming in EZSoft Hold down the left mouse button to drag the Static text screen element onto the screen gt Place the mouse over the Static text screen element hold down the left mouse button and drag the screen element to the required position Enter the required text in the Static text tab and select the language to which the text is to be assigned MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 283 Visualization with EZD E T N You define the available languages in the Languages tab of the Screen overview These languages apply to the text elements of all screens The height of the element frame adjusts itself to the font size either normal or double font size You can change the font size
171. en elements are sufficiently large for containing the corresponding texts of all languages selected This can be checked easily in the screen overview 318 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Associated variable tab On the Associated variable tab you define the variable with the value for activating the output text Message texts tab Assign in the Message texts tab the value of the associated variable for its corresponding message text and select the language and the default text Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Display change tab The Display change tab offers the following display forms of the message which can be controlled with an associated variable flashing Inverted MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 319 Visualization with EZD E T N Example program 1 activating message texts with a Boolean variable The program consists of seven screens that can be selected using the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LEDO3 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The message texts
172. ent via the connection This ensures that the local data of the connected device is not destroyed in the event of a communication fault Close Terminal mode Press the button to close the Terminal mode The button cannot be assigned to other tasks if you wish to use Terminal mode in your application Use the button to change from the visualization to the Status display Otherwise the Terminal mode menu cannot be reached BP ress the button This returns you back to your local device Press the ESC button twice The Status display of the EZD device is active The flashing star at the top right of the display is no longer present The display must be initialized again if the CPU was fitted to it under live conditions Press the DEL and ESC button simultaneously This will reinitialize the display MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 115 E T N 4 Programming wiring diagrams with EZD This chapter describes all the functions available with EZD EZD operation DeLi amp ey ae amp Buttons for drawing circuit diagrams and function block usage Delete rung contact relay or empty line in the circuit diagram Toggle between break and make contact Connect contacts and relays Add rungs Av Change values Cursor up down lt gt Change position Cursor left right Cursor buttons set as P buttons lt Input P1 Input P2 gt Input P3 Input P4 U
173. erated is in RUN mode and is displaying a screen This screen is not displayed in Terminal mode EZD message The remote device is in Graphic mode Press the ALT and ESC button simultaneously This will call up the Status display The EZ NET station 2 controls the display of the EZD device The activation of Terminal mode is indicated by the flashing star at the top right of the Status display Caution In Terminal mode you can operate a device that may be positioned far from your actual location All access rights that you would also require locally are granted to you Itis not always possible to obtain a view of the situation locally Use of this operating mode and the execution of any changes to device settings should only be carried out with the utmost caution A device with a display and operating unit can also be operated locally In this case operation at the device concerned is always faster than operation via Terminal mode Bear in mind that this may lead to conflicts that may trigger faults or unforeseen events 114 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N START Hi STATION ID STATION ID SA OOS 47 m2 4 I 945 89 F ST STOF Terminal mode In Terminal mode the EZD device makes its display and operating unit available to the connected device Only data for the display and the status of the buttons is s
174. erating mode LED EZ NET LED e OHO Inputs outputs Figure 3 Device overview of inputs outputs Inputs Analog output optional Outputs MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 15 EZD E T N Type references for the EZD EZD XXXX XX XX Additional functions Equipment B Operator buttons ME Open loop control closed loop control NT Open loop control closed loop control EZ NET Device function Number display and enclosure in mm CP8 Power supply and CPU rating 8 R relay outputs T Transistor outputs A Analog output Number Number of inputs and outputs Multi function display EZD operation DEL amp N Buttons DEL Delete object in circuit diagram ALT Special functions in circuit diagram Status display Cursor buttons lt gt v Move cursor Select menu items Set contact numbers contacts and values OK Next menu level Save your entry ESC Previous menu level Cancel Toggle between visualization display and Status display close Terminal mode In visualization applications the operating unit can be used for other functions than the ones stated above In this case the buttons are assigned the function selected in the application The standard button functions are only restored when you leave the application 1
175. erred with a rising trigger edge to an operand e g MD42 QA01 on output GM Output QV retains its value until itis overwritten PID controller EZD provides 32 PID controllers DC01 to DC32 The PID controllers allow you to implement closed loop control functions Caution A knowledge of closed loop control is required in order to use the PID controllers The control system must be familiar so that the PID controller can function correctly MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 213 Programming wiring E T N Three separate manipulated variables can be output One manipulated variable can be output via an analog output Two manipulated variables can be processed via two pulse width modulated outputs It is therefore useful to run up to three closed loop controllers per program simultaneously Projects can be structured by selecting the controller number Example Project with 3 devices Program 1 Controller DC 10 11 Program 2 Controller DC20 21 and 22 Program 3 Controller DC30 Wiring a PID controller You integrate a PID controller in your circuit as a contact and coil H oO DCIREN k COEF E OCOPEI E DCEO H 5i i OCIRSE Dele Itsa cee aenncen SM ib Figure 112 EZD circuit diagram with PID controller Parameter display and parameter set for PID controller DCO UNF sI Dco PID controller function bl
176. errors may occur when transferring from one function block to another one Analog value comparator threshold value switch EZD provides 32 analog value comparators from A 01 to A 32 With an analog value comparator or threshold value switch you can for example compare analog input values with a setpoint value AIl EZD DC variants have analog inputs The following comparisons are possible Function block input I 1 greater than or equal to equal to less than or equal to function block input T2 Using the factors F 1 and F 2 as inputs enables you to amplify and adjust the values of the function block inputs The 0 function block input can be used as an offset for the 14 input The H function block input is used for the positive and negative switching hysteresis of the input 12 The contact Switches according to the selected comparison mode of the function block 158 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N A Od oT I Fi rIg Fi 705 PHY Function blocks I Di A 1 ran repa el 50 02 A 14g1 RG 03 Figure 96 EZD circuit diagram with analog value comparators Parameter display and parameter set for analog value comparators A g2 Function block analog value comparator number 02 GT Greater than mode Appears in the parameter display HH Comparison value 1 Fi Gain factor for
177. es 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per channel used Function of the year time switch function block The year time switch can operate with ranges individual days months years or combinations Years ON 2002 to OFF 2010 means Switch on at 00 00 on 01 01 2002 and switch off at 00 00 on the 01 01 2011 Months ON 04 to OFF 10 means Switch on at 00 00 on 1st April and switch off at 00 00 on 1st November Days ON 02 to OFF 25 means Switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd and switch off at 00 00 on the 26th Rules for the year time switch The contact switches in the defined years ON to OFF the defined months ON to OFF and in the days entered ON to OFF Time ranges must be input with two channels one forON and one for OFF Overlapping channels The firstON date switches on and the firstOFF date switches off Avoid incomplete entries It hinders transparency and leads to unwanted functions MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 231 Programming wiring E T N Example 1 HYI A Year range selection 0H 0g The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on POFF 05 J anuary 1 2002 and remain on until 23 59 on 31 December 2005 Example 2 HYI A Month range selection 0H 13 The year time switch HY 01 should switch on at 00 00 on Olst MOFF 11 March and remain on until 23 59 on 30th September Example 3 HDi Day
178. et Actual cycle time is less than the set cycle time If the maximum cycle time present is less than the set cycle time the set cycle time is constant Actual cycle time is greater than the set cycle time Ifthe maximum cycle time presentis greater than the set cycle time the set cycle time has no effect 256 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Attention The shorter the cycle time the faster the control and regulation process Setas small a value for the set cycle time as possible The processing of the function blocks reading of the inputs and writing of outputs is only carried out once every cycle Exception All function blocks that are processed irrespective of the controller Timing relay EZD provides 32 timing relays from T 01 to T 32 A timing relay is used to change the switching duration and the make and break times of a switching contact The delay times can be configured between 5 ms and 99 h 59 min Wiring a timing relay You integrate a timing relay into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The function of the relay is defined via the parameter display The relay is started via the trigger coil T EN and can be selectively reset via the reset coil T RE The actual timeout running can be stopped via the third coil TSL To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram I ji
179. et to zero The contact CH ZE is active Range F The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the direction of the values positive or negative 202 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks High speed incremental encoder counters EZD provides two high speed incremental encoder counters Cl01 and C102 The high speed counter inputs are hardwired to the digital inputs 11 12 13 and 14 These counter relays allow you to count events independently of the cycle time You can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value You can use a CI counter if you wish to define a start value The CI counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter frequency and pulse shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 The signals on channels A and B must lead or lag by 90 Otherwise the counting direction cannot be determined Double the number of pulses are counted as a result of the internal method of operation of the incremental encoder The incremental encoder evaluates the rising and falling edges This ensures that the pulse count is not affected by oscillation of a signal edge If the number of pulses are required divide the value by two Wiring of a counter The follow
180. et to 3 the display change occurs from numerical value 0 to 3 There is therefore no display change between 3 and 7 Right numerical value The numerical value is inverted in the range from 0 to 3 and from 7 to 10 The upper limit value is set to 7 the display change occurs from numerical value 7 to 10 in the Display change tab and the lower limit value is set to 3 the display change occurs from numerical value 0 to 3 There is therefore no display change between 3 and 7 No display change Display change Display change Display change without 3 7s without 3 7s internal trigger internal trigger 6 57s 6 57s bh 95 amp ERZ Figure 166 Display change via internal limit value comparison MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 309 Visualization with EZD E T N Display Marker word1 C1 16 Overflow signal Timer 4 ms Underf Low signal Counter 2 Screen 8 Screen 8 shows an example of outputting a marker word The numerical value in the screen is associated with marker word MWO1 The variable type is Word A value range from 0 to 999 is defined in the Number range format tab The timing relay T09 switches the counter C01 gt circuit diagram in EZS oft every two seconds The output QV of the counter function block writes the data to marker word MWO1 defined in the Parameters tab in the Function block o
181. etwork COM LINK Serial E T N CAN has been used as the basis for the design of the EZ NET network The messages have been adapted and optimized to suit the requirements of the EZD environment EZ NET network topologies addressing and functions The EZ NET allows the configuration ofa line topology There are two wiring methods which can be used for the required addressing options Loop through the unit wiring arrangement e Wiring arrangement using a T connector and a spur line Loop through the unit wiring method With this wiring method itis possible to implement the addressing of the stations via station 1 or the EZS oft If the line is interrupted the network is no longer operational from this point in the network T connector and spur line Each device must be addressed individually with this wiring method by Downloading the program Downloading the address with E ZS oft Using the display or The device is already assigned an address If a spur line is removed on a station all other devices in the network remain functional The spur line between the T connector and the device must not exceed 0 3 m Otherwise communication via EZ NET may be impaired 334 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN EZ NET network topologies addressing Topology and addressing examples Physical Station number Loop through the T connector and spur location pla
182. f the Display tab The overlaid section of the bitmap is therefore not visible The first bitmap at the lowest level is permanently activated making it visible as long as all other bitmaps are invisible This produces a small moving picture MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 299 Visualization with EZD E T N t Figure 159 Rotating arrows Numerical value This mask element allows you to display untreated or scaled signal states in decimal format Value and scaling range The value range defines the range that is to be displayed If the values are below or above this range the EZD activates an underflow or overflow signal The scaling range is used for scaling the value range The lower and upper values of the scaling range are assigned to the lower and upper values of the value range respectively The EZD displays the value range if a scaling range has not been defined Examples In order for example to display the value range 0 to 255 of a counter as a percentage 0 to 100 enter 0 as the minimum value and 255 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter as the unit of measure Activate the Scaling range field and enter 0 as the minimum value and 100 as the maximum value In order for example to display the value range 0 to 120 of a timing relay in minutes 0 to 2 min enter 0 as the minimum value and 120 as
183. f you no longer know the exact password you can try to re enter the password several times The DELETE FUNCTION has not been deactivated You have entered an incorrect password ENTER FASSWORD EO gt Re enter the password After the fourth entry attempt EZD will ask whether you wish DELETE ALL to delete the circuit diagram and data Press ESC No data will be deleted OK Circuit diagram data and password are deleted EZD will return to the Status display _ gt If you no longer know the exact password you can press OK to unlock the protected EZD The saved circuit diagram and all function relay parameters will be lost Pressing ESC will retain the circuit diagram and data You can then make another four attempts to enter the password MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 363 EZD Settings E T N Changing the menu language ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANG PORTUGUES HEDERLAND SVENSKA POLSKI TURKCE EZD provides ten menu languages which are set as required via the System menu Language Display English ENGLISH German DEUTSCH French FRANCAIS Spanish ESPANOL Italian ITALIANO Portuguese PORTUGUES Dutch NEDERLANDS Swedish SVENSKA Polish POLSKI Turkish TURKCE Language selection is only possible if EZD is not password protected Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu Select ME
184. face 30 minutes after unlocking the device using EZS oft via the password menu Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu Open the password menu via the menu option SECURITY EZD will only show this password menu if a password is CHANGE Fy present ACTIVATE Make a note of the password before you activate it If the password is no longer known EZD can be unlocked DELETE FUNCTION is not active however the circuit diagram and data settings will be lost Attention If the password is unknown or lost and the delete password function is deactivated The unit can only be reset to the factory setting by the manufacturer The program and all data are lost gt Select ACTIVATE PW and confirm with OK The password is now active EZD will automatically return to the Status display 360 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N ENTER FASSWORD Se Cak a i ie key Password protection You must unlock EZD with the password before you implementa protected function enter a protected menu or the System menu Unlocking EZD Unlocking EZD will deactivate the password You can reactivate password protection later via the password menu or by switching the power supply off and on again Press OK to switch to the main menu The PASSWORD entry will flash Press OK to enter the password entry menu If EZD shows PRO
185. gh speed incremental encoder 203 value encoder CP comparators Comparators 208 D display Text function block 210 DB data block Data function block 211 DC DDC controller direct PID controllers 213 digital control FT filter PT1 signal smoothing filter 219 GT GET GET network 213 HW hora iat week Seven day timer 224 HY hora tat year Twelve month timer 229 LS linear scaling Value scaling 233 MR master reset Master reset 240 NC numeric coding Numerical converters 241 OT operating time Operating hours counter 247 PT PUT PUT network 248 PW pulse width modulation Pulse width modulation 216 SC synchronize clocks Synchronize clock via network 253 428 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N List of the function blocks Element Meaning of abbreviation Function block designation Page ST set time Set cycle time 221 T timing relays Timing relay 257 VC value capsuling Value limitation 270 Jumps 203 Function block coils Coil Meaning of abbreviation Description C count input Counter input D_ direction input Count up down indicator ED enable Differential component Activate differential component El enable integral component Activate integral component EN enable Enable module EP enable proportional component Activate proportional component RE reset Reset actual value to zero SE set enable Set to a predefined value ST stop STOP block processing Te trigger Trigger coi
186. ght from your PC MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 135 Programming wiring E T N Working with contacts and In EZD circuit diagrams the switches buttons and relays of relays conventional circuit diagrams are connected up using input contacts and relay coils Conventional circuit EZD circuit diagram EZD connection Connect make contact 1 to input terminal 1 sH sA K Connect make contact S2 to input terminal 12 Connect load H1 to output Q1 S1 or S2 switch on H1 K1 mS o EZD circuit diagram I 7 fen ri First specify which input and output terminals you wish to use in your circuit The signal states on the input terminals are detected in the circuit diagram with the input contacts I R or RN The outputs are switched in the circuit diagram with the output relays Q S or SN Entering and changing contacts and relay function coils Contacts I 02 An input contact is selected in the EZD via the contact name i and contact number Contact name Example input contact Contact number 136 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N CFOiST Contact name Contact number Contact function PRHO ji Station address Contact name Contact number 5G 4 Coil function Coil name Coil number T DHEN est Coil function Coil name Coil number Function block SESN04 Coil function
187. h the break contact bit logic In this way the bit display takes on the opposite status of output Q1 In other words when Q1 is On only the frame of the bit display is visible However the visibility of the bit display is only activated with the Boolean operand Q3 as the break contact bit logic is selected The bit display is overlaid partly with static text Frame with Q3 on Figure 153 Bit display with frame Example program 2 bit display with automatic screen change This program is a copy of the program Bit Display 01 The only difference is that the screens are activated in succession automatically screen change in the Screen overview gt Screen activation tab gt Activate Yes The program consists of five screens containing bit display elements 290 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Examples Folder Files can be found onthe EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Bit Display 02 Date and time This screen element shows the date and time of the EZD real time clock on the display You can also select for this international display formats according to the ten EZ system languages plus the USA display format Programming in EZSoft Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Date and time screen element onto the screen gt P lace the mouse over the screen element hold down the left mouse button and position it as required
188. he event of a screen change depends on the size of the screens to be loaded During a screen change the new screen is loaded from the screen memory into the RAM Every 200 ms EZD checks whether a new screen has to be loaded The loading time can be calculated as follows screen size in byte multiplied by 80 us Example Screen size 250 bytes The loading time for the screen is 250 x 80 us 20 ms If you require the EZD to have a small cycle time use several small screens so that the loading time is not too long during a screen change Only display necessary information in the screens concerned Section Memory division P age 278 The loading of screen data and screen changes can be implemented in any segment of the program cycle Take this behavior into account when considering the reaction time of your entire control system Distribute tasks among several devices in the EZ NET EZ800 for open and closed loop control functions EZD for display and operator functions MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 387 Inside EZD li I an Di f amp i I li a L 9 Cid B 1b8E ane E T N Effects on the creation of the circuit diagram EZD evaluates the circuit diagram in these six segments in succession You should take into account two factors when creating your circuit diagram The changeover of a relay coil does not change the
189. he network station at physical location 1 with station number 1 has a station list The left hand column is the physical location You can only assign a physical location to unused station numbers Physical location 1 is permanently assigned to station number 1 gt Use the and v cursor buttons to select the STATION menu and press the OK button Proceed to the station with physical address 2 i4 4 gt Select the required physical location with the and v 2 0 cursor buttons Press the OK button f _ P Use cursor buttons and v to select station number 2 i4 4 PrP ress the OK button 2 2 At physical location 2 the station has been assigned station i 4 address 2 Press ESC to return to the STATIONS menu item 98 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuring an EZ NET network Configuring an EZ NET network The EZ NET network can only be configured from station 1 Requirement All stations are correctly connected to the network and the termination resistors have been connected All stations have a power supply and are in STOP mode The POW LED is permanently lit The NET LED is permanently lit If the connected stations are configured all stations automatically switch to the STOP mode Proceed to the CONFIGURE menu item and press the OK PARAMETERS button STATIONS CONFIGURE CONFIGURE You will be asked to acknow
190. he required rung L with the cursor buttons The first contact on the rung is always indicated Press OK The cursor remains stationary at the required rung contact Ll Deleting the rung EZD only removes empty rungs without contacts or coils gt Delete all the contacts and coils from the rung gt Position the cursor on the first contact field of the empty rung gt Press DEL The subsequent rung s will be pulled up and any existing links between rungs will be retained MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 143 Programming wiring P02 P01 Q P04 gt E T N Switching via the cursor buttons With EZD you can also use the four cursor buttons as hard wired inputs in the circuit diagram The buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts F 04 to F 04 The P buttons can be activated and deactivated in the gt System menu The P buttons can also be used for testing circuits or manual operation These button functions are also useful for servicing and commissioning purposes Example 1 A lamp at output Q 1 is switched on and off via inputs 11 and 12 or by using cursor buttons T ERI 001 F le L anand FH P D4 Figure 83 Switch Q1 via I1 12 orv Example 2 Input 1 is used to control output Q1 15 switches over to cursor operation and via 01 disconnects the rung I 01 I SM Oi a l ere ZMH
191. hed directly before outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 so that the outputs are only active if screen 1 is active when counter C01 has the value 0 The screen activation is executed via counter C01 This has the value 4 as the upper setpoint SH This therefore generates the counter values 0 1 2 3 and 4 The counter is activated with every reset of timing relays T01 to T06 The counter value 0 activates screen 1 and counter value 1 screen 2 Screen 2 remains activated when the counter value is 2 3 or 4 and counter value 2 and 3 cause the default text to be displayed as there are no message text assigned to these values The counter value 4 causes the message text RESTART to be displayed in screen 2 If the counter C01 reaches its upper setpoint with this value this starts the on delayed timing relay T08 This then resets the counter C01 to 0 after the set time of 0 8 s has elapsed This loop is repeated continuously Examples Folder Files can be found onthe EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Message _Text_04 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 327 Visualization with EZD E T N Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine FUNE Screen 1 The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display Screen 2 The second screen contains a message text element with two message texts The mess
192. hing for contacts and coils 142 Go to a rung 143 Deleting the rung 143 Switching via the cursor buttons 144 Checking the circuit diagram 145 Function block editor 146 Checking function blocks 150 Coil functions 151 Function blocks 156 Analog value comparator threshold value switch 158 Arithmetic function block 161 Data block comparator 165 Data block transfer 172 Boolean operation 183 Counters 186 High speed counters 192 Frequency counters 193 High speed counters 197 High speed incremental encoder counters 203 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 E T N Comparators 208 Text output function block 210 Data function block 211 PID controller 213 Signal smoothing filter 219 GET fetch a value from the network 222 Seven day time switch 224 Year time switch 229 Value scaling 233 Jumps 237 Master reset 240 Numerical converters 241 Operating hours counter 247 PUT send a value onto the network 248 Pulse width modulation 250 Setting date time 253 Setcycle time 254 Timing relay 257 Value limitation 270 Example with timing relay and counter function block 272 5 Visualization with EZD 277 Screens 277 Memory division 278 Western European character table 279 Screen overview 281 Screen editor 283 Static text 283 Bit display 287 Date and time 291 Bitmap 294 Numerical value 300 Example numerical value 302
193. hinin ionnan 224 229 THMING TEA Y inaa na 257 Impulse relayi nesnaraini 152 Increasing the input Current eerren 57 Incremental encoder c seeseseseessseseseeeeess 64 203 MPU CONTA CIS icia aa 136 Inrush current lIMItAtION cesses 57 Intera CE socian naa ana ae 399 InterferentE ic ce esevsssanssatesaspasigavegsacssacteinnedasdacanints 55 INVOROMG ici EE E E 139 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 437 E T N PUMPS 34 brite iad aa aa 237 LOtCHING aane a 152 Latching relay 153 LED AISPlA Yannie ana O 19 Overview Selection Make contact Inverting on ay Marker relay cssscessccsessessssstsssssssrsssesrssseeessseeessseees Memory card DelOUing E 403 INS QMO MN eeticascivetcveniesadaiivetatdnicaveteaies 400 Memory management Program MOMOLY sssrin 389 AMan tininnas 389 Screen MEMON sssrin 389 Menu Changing level cscscesscsssssssssesesssssesseeensees 87 Changing the language nsss 364 Language Setting ec iceeeeeneeeee 83 334 Operator guidance essersi 17 Message INVALID PROG vices 403 404 Mode Changing anginy 92 Mounting Display operating unit ccssnsssnrersn 35 Inputs outputs onto the power supply CP U module vu eects 41 Power supply CPU MOdUle csccsessessreseens 38 Protective COVED sssscsssssesstssssrssssesssseserssesensess 32 Protective membrane snesen 30 SCheW AXING enginn a 45 Top hatrail sieirnasraiuia 38 43 Network Addressihg sinranac
194. ified via the PARAMETERS menu The actual value is only displayed in RUN mode Callup the parameter display for this via the power flow display or PARAMETERS menu 276 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N 5 Visualization with EZD In the following description the term visualization is used for the display and operator function All the visualization functions can be programmed using EZS oft The visualization functions can then be loaded from there to the EZD or onto a memory card download function This chapter uses the examples supplied to describe the basic methods of designing visualization systems using EZS oft Screens EZS oft manages the visualization elements in screens These elements can be inserted in the screens and are called screen elements in the following description You can use up to 255 screen elements inside one screen Due to the memory allocation of the system itis more advisable to use several screens gt Section Memory division Page 278 The following screen elements are available Static text Bit display Date and time Bitmap e Numerical value Value entry Message text The individual screen elements are explained in the examples MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 277 Visualization with EZD E T N Memory division Screen memory _ Screen 5 9 Pr
195. iggered No data blocks are compared if an error is present The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the enable Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of marker ranges direct Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB10 Block 2 atMB40 Each block is 10 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MEi0 Comparison range 2 12 ME40 Number of bytes HO 10 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 167 Programming wiring E T N Comparison Valueofmarker Comparison Value of marker range 1 range 1 range 2 range 2 decimal decimal B10 39 B40 39 B11 56 B41 56 B12 88 B42 88 B13 57 B43 57 B14 123 B44 123 B15 55 B45 55 B16 134 B46 134 B17 49 B47 49 B18 194 B48 194 B19 213 B49 213 The comparison result of the function block BC01 is BCO1EQ 1 the data block ranges have the same content Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of a marker range with offset Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB15 Block 2 at MB65 Each block is 4 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MBS Comparison range 2 Ip b4 Number of bytes HO 4 Marker MB01 1 mS Comparison range 2 Constant 64 MBO1 plus Offset 1 64 65 gt MB65 168 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function block
196. in their previous State MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 397 Inside EZD E T N QA analog output The analog output operates with decimal values between 0 and 1023 This corresponds to a 10 bit resolution At the outputthis corresponds to a physical voltage between 0 V and 10 V DC Negative values such as 512 are evaluated as zero and output as 0 V DC Positive values greater than 1023 such as 2047 are evaluated as 1023 and output as 10 V DC Loading and saving programs You can either use the EZD interface to save programs to a memory card or use EZSoft and a transmission cable to transfer them to a PC EZD without display and keypad EZD models without buttons and a display can be loaded with the EZD program via E ZSoft or automatically from the fitted memory card every time the power supply is switched on 398 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Loading and saving programs Interface The EZD interface is covered Remove the cover carefully Figure 196 Remove cover and plug in gt To close the slot again push the cover back onto the slot Memory card The card is available as an accessory EZ M 256K for EZD Circuit diagrams containing all the relevant data can be transferred from the EZ M 256K memory card to EZD Each memory card can hold one EZD program MN05013005E For more information visit www
197. individual stations and diagnostics Page 344 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 223 Programming wiring E T N Function of the GET function block 2 Figure 115 Signal diagram of GET function block 1 GT Q1 2 value on GT QV gt The GET function blocks are assigned the value 0 when the power supply is switched on Seven day time switch EZD is equipped with a real time clock which you can use in the circuit diagram as a 7 day time switch and a year time switch The procedure for setting the time is described under Section Setting date time and daylight saving time on Page 367 EZD provides 32 seven day time switches HW01 to HW32 for a total of 128 switching times Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set four on and off times The channels are set via the parameter display The time is backed up in the event of a power failure and continues to run although the time switch relays will no longer switch The contacts are kept open when de energized Refer to Chapter Technical data Page 407 for information on the buffer time Wiring of a 7 day time switch A 7 day time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram as a contact 224 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Hult 4 PDV poe ON SOF F A Function blocks Hilt 4 amp 1 rad Figure 1
198. ing assignment of the digital inputs apply e 1 counter input for the counter C101 channel A e 2 counter input for the counter C101 channel B 3 counter input for the counter C102 channel A e 14 counter input for the counter C102 channel B MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 203 Programming wiring CIN 5H PEL yeu BM E T N To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CF CH CI counters only once You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts CITEN CIDRE CIDSE aa ode amp l3 M 14 Figure 106 EZD circuit diagram with high speed incremental encoder counter Parameter display and parameter set for high speed incremental encoder counter CIDI High speed incremental encoder counter function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display 5H Upper setpoint PSL Lower setpoint pay Defined actual value Preset GS Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change setpoint values and or the preset value and the enable of the parameter display Value range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147 483647 Each pulse is counted twice Example value at Cl QV gt 42000 The counter ha
199. inked in the program The EZD saves the entered value internally The value is processed by the program and displayed until it is modified again by the operator or the program Without an operator entry this mask element functions like the numerical value mask element and therefore displays the value of the associated set variable When you start to enter a value on the EZD device the entry field shows the last variable value Y ou start the entry by pressing OK This activates Selection mode in which you can use the cursor buttons to move between the value entry elements of a screen The order of the selected elements is from the back to the front This order is defined by their positioning and can be altered in the toolbar Pressing OK once more activates Entry mode Value and scaling range The value range defines the range that is to be displayed If the values are below or above this range the EZD activates an underflow or overflow signal The scaling range is used for scaling the value range The lower and upper values of the scaling range are assigned to the lower and upper values of the value range respectively The EZD displays the value range if a scaling range has not been defined Examples In order for example to display the value range 0 to 255 of a counter as a percentage 0 to 100 enter 0 as the minimum value and 255 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter as the unit of measure A
200. int value L 5 counting direction coil C D_ 6 accept preset actual value coil C SE 190 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks 7 reset coil C RE 8 contact make contact C OF upper setpoint value reached exceeded 9 contact make contact C FB lower setpoint value reached undershot 10 actual value equal to zero 11 out of value range Range A The counter has the value zero The contacts C ZE actual value equal to zero and C FB lower setpoint value undershot are active The counter receives counter values and increases the actual value C ZE drops out as well as C FB and also when the lower setpoint value is reached Range B The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper setpoint value The upper setpoint value reached contact C OF becomes active Range C The coil C SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the preset actual value The contacts go to the respective position Range D The counting direction coil C D_ is actuated If counting pulses are present downward countis initiated Ifthe lower setpoint value is undershot the contact C FB becomes active Range E The reset coil C RE is activated The actual value is set to zero The contact C ZE is active Range F The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the
201. invalid offset error The value of marker byte MB40 is to be transferred to MW54 and subsequent marker words The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MB4O Comparison range 2 T2 MW54 Number of bytes MO C NEN The value of C 01QV is 788 This value is too big The value at MO can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the destination range is outside of the permissible range is output BTO1E3 is 1 CPY mode copy marker ranges There is one source range and one destination range The source range is specified at gt I 1 The destination range is specified at Iz The length of the source and destination range is specified by the number of bytes at the gt MOQ input The content of the source range is copied to the marker bytes in the destination range The function block executes the copy operation if there is a rising edge from 0 to 1 atthe BT T_ Trigger coil The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the trigger 178 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Example Copy of marker blocks definition of marker ranges direct The content of marker bytes 10 to 19 is to be transferred to marker bytes 20 to 29 Parameters of BTO1 function block Source range It MEO Destination range I2 MER
202. ions for analog value processing Ensure that the reference potential is connected Connect the 0 V of the power supply unit for the different setpoint potentiometers and sensors shown in the examples to the 0 V terminal of the EZD power feed Setpoint potentiometer LO1 02 101 i gt al A N 1 3 kQ 0 25W 1ka0 25w TD trp As L pyp ov hv OOO agn o 00 0 0O00 0 a0 aH 2o00 o aoaaa a davano D 24V OV OV m 122 B 14 15 l6 I7 18 1910 111112 a Figure 42 Setpoint potentiometer with upstream resistor Use a potentiometer with a resistance of S 1 KQ e g 1 kQ 0 25 W MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 61 E T N Installation Temperature sensor brightness sensor 20 mA sensor LO1 LO1 gt 1A A 12V 0 10 V NO Esg 24V OV OV Figure 43 Temperature sensor brightness sensor 20 mA sensor ocd s010 soo 3 00 00 oo noo wOoO BOO s00 a Soo oo oo oo 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA sensors can be connected easily without any problem using an external 500 Q resistor The following values apply 4mA 19V 10 mA 4 8V 20 mA 9 5V according to U R x 1 478Q x 10 mA 4 8 V 62 For more information visit www EatonE lec
203. is decreased by the set step width Changeover relay The state of a variable or a function block input is negated 332 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N 6 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial Connection Introduction to EZ NET All EZD units have an EZ NET network interface connection This network is designed for eight stations Using the EZ NET you can Process additional inputs and outputs Implement faster and improved control using decentralized programs Synchronize date and time Read and write inputs and outputs Send values to other stations Receive values from other stations Load programs from or to any station The EZ NET network is based on the CAN network Controller Area Network CAN is specified by the ISO 11898 standard CAN has the following in built features e Message oriented transmission protocol Multimaster bus access capabilities with non destructive bitwise bus arbitration via priority messaging Arbitration Aninstance which defines which hardware can use the bus next Multicast broadcast messaging with receiver side message filtering e High level of real time capability short reaction time for high priority messages short fault message get times e Functionality in environments with severe interference short block lengths e High level of error security MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 333 EZ NET N
204. is written very rapidly onto the network as they change continuously leading to unnecessary loading of the network If intelligent devices are required to exchange bit information it should be implemented via RN and SN SEND IO lt factory default setting Automatic change of the RUN and STOP mode REMOTE RUN should be activated if stations 2 to 8 are to automatically follow the mode change of station 1 during operation Input and output devices must always have SEND I0 activated to ensure that station 1 always receives up to date input and output data Intelligent stations with display only follow the operating mode change when the display is showing the Status display or a text MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 341 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N V The following is of utmost importance during commissioning Attention If several engineers are commissioning a machine or system involving several spatially separated elements via the EZ NET network it must be ensured that REMOTE RUN is not activated Otherwise unwanted machine or system starts may occur during commissioning The associated events depend on the machines or systems involved REMOTE RUN lt factory default setting Input output device REMOTE 10 configuration All devices are factory set for operation as input and output devices This has the advantage that devices can be used immedia
205. ition to ensure that the state of a station can be recognized by other stations The states of the inputs and outputs are sent cyclically and at the set baud rate irrespective of the SEND I0 setting If the inputs and outputs of a station are not recognized by other stations after a time determined by the baud rate the station is deemed to be disconnected until the next sign of life is recognized 344 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the EZ NET network Evaluation occurs at the following intervals Baud rate Stations mustsenda sign Stations recognize the of life every absence of a sign of life signal after KB ms ms 1000 60 180 500 60 180 250 120 360 125 240 720 50 600 1800 20 1500 4500 10 3000 9000 If the absence of a sign of life is detected the respective diagnostics contact is setto 1 Diagnostics contact D01 Station number D 02 D 03 D 04 D05 D 06 D07 D 08 Corns olaj A w N e MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 345 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Ifa station does not send a sign of life signal station not available EZ NET interrupted the respective diagnostics contact ID is activated Attention If the states of the inputs outputs or data are required by a station without fail
206. ivation pulse for activating the screens is supplied by timing relay T01 This generates the counter values 0 to 5 Screen 1 is activated with counter value 1 screen 2 with counter value 2 etc Once the counter s upper switch value has been reached timing relay T02 is started which resets the counter This therefore produces a continuous loop Timing relay T02 provides a reset delay for the counter Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Static_Text_03 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes Screen 4 Screen 4 shows four static texts arranged in rows 286 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Bit display The bit display screen element has an input that can be associated with a Boolean variable The signal status of this variable changes the bit display screen element from a full screen to a frame in the EZD display Programming in EZSoft gt Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Bit display screen element onto the screen PP lace the mouse over the element hold down the left mouse button and position it as required The height and width of the element frame is variable and can be adjusted accordingly by enlarging or reducing the element frame vertically horizonta
207. ive cover 32 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Figure 7 Removing the front frame Remove the front frame as shown in the figure The protective cover can be mounted in two different positions Choose the position that is most suitable for the application at hand and your requirements Figure 8 Position of the protective cover MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 33 Installation E T N Figure 9 Mounting the protective cover gt Mount the protective cover as shown in the figure Sealing the protective cover fos Figure 10 Sealing the protective cover The grip handle of the protective cover is provided with holes that can be used in any mounting position You can fit a wire or similar material through these holes in order to seal the cover If the wire is provided with a lead seal the cover is sealed The cover can then only be opened by breaking the seal or the wire 34 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Mounting the display operating unit front mounting e ania L Figure 11 Drill holes for the EZD gt Drill and punch out two 22 5 mm diameter holes The diameter is the same as is normally required for control circuit devices Ob
208. ive hysteresis 1 Input 1 Ist input word 2 Input 2 2nd input word KP Standard Proportional gain E Minimum make time Minimum make time manual value Manual manipulated variable numbers of elements Number of elements os Offset Offset for the value 1 PD Period duration Period duration SH Setpoint high Upper limit value SL Setpoint low Lower limit value SV Set value Defined actual value Preset TC Scan time TG Recovery time TN Standard Rate time TV Standard Reset time X1 X1 interpolation point 1 Lower value of source range abscissa X2 Interpolation point 2 abscissa Upper value of source range Y1 Interpolation point 1 ordinate Lower value of target range Y2 Interpolation point 2 ordinate Upper value of target range MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 431 Appendix E T N Function block output operands Input Meaning of abbreviation Description QV Output value Output value Other operands Other Description operands B Marker byte 8 bit value A Analog input if available on device W Marker word 16 bit value QA Analog output if available on device D Marker double word 32 bit value NU Constant number value range from 2147483648 to 2147 483647 432 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Memory requirement Memory requirement The following table provides an overview of the memory requirement of the EZD rungs function blocks an
209. k number 16 Appears in the parameter display Ht Input value GW Actual value Inputs The function block input I t can be assigned the following operands Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs I1A01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 211 Programming wiring E T N IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Contacts DB01Q1 to DB32Q1 Contact make contact DB Q1 switches to status 1 if the trigger signal is set to 1 Coils DBO1T_ to DB32T_ acceptance of the value at gt I1 witha rising edge Memory requirement of the data function block The data block function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block input Retention Data function blocks can be operated with retentive actual values The quantity can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu 212 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N A Function blocks Function of the data function block ee M do L Figure 111 Signal diagram of data function block 1 value at input gt 11 2 trigger coil DB T_ 3 value on DB QV gt The value at input 14 is only transf
210. l MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 429 Appendix E T N Function block contacts Contact Meaning of abbreviation Description CY carry Status 1 if the value range is exceeded carry El error 1 Error 1 dependent on function block E2 error 2 Error 2 dependent on function block E3 error 3 Error 3 dependent on function block EQ equal Comparison result status 1 if values equal FB fall below Status 1 if the actual value is less than or equal to the lower setpoint value GT greater than Status 1 if the value at 11 gt 12 LI limit indicator Value range manipulated variable exceeded LT less than Status 1 if the value at 11 lt 12 OF overflow Status 1 ifthe actual value is greater than or equal to the upper setpoint value Q1 output Q1 Switch output QV output value Current actual value of the function block e g counter value ZE zero Status 1 if the value of the element input QV is equal to zero 430 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N List of the function blocks Function block inputs constants operands Input Meaning of abbreviation Description F1 Factor 1 Gain factor for 11 I1 F1 x Value F2 Factor 2 Gain factor for 12 I2 F2 x Value HY Hysteresis Switching hysteresis for value 12 Value HY applies to positive and negat
211. l isolation To supply voltage No To the digital inputs No To the outputs Yes To the EZ NET network Yes Input type DC voltage Signal range VDC 0 to 10 Resolution analog V 0 01 Resolution digital Bit 10 Value 0 to 1023 Input impedance kQ 11 2 Accuracy Two EZD devices from actual value a 3 Within a unit from actual value 17 18 111 112 az 7 Conversion time analog digital Debounce ON ms 20 Debounce OFF Each cycle time Input current mA lt 1 Cable length shielded m 30 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 419 Appendix E T N Relay outputs EZD R Number 4 Type of outputs Relays In groups of 1 Connection of outputs in parallel to increase the output Not permissible Protection for an output relay Miniature circuit breaker B16 A 16 or fuse slow blow A 8 Potential isolation to mains power supply input PC interface memory card Yes NET network EZ LINK Safe isolation VAC 300 Basic insulation VAC 600 Mechanical lifespan Switch 10 x 106 operations Contacts relays Conventional thermal current UL A 8 10 Recommended for load at 12 V AC DC mA gt 500 Protected against short circuit cos 1 A 600 16 A characteristic B B16 at Protected against short circuit cos 0 5 to 0 7 A 900 16 A characteristic B B16 at Rated impulse withstand voltage Ump contact coil kV 6 Rated insulation vol
212. l isolation of the low voltage for the 24 volt supply Only use power supply units complying with IEC 60364 4 41 VDE 0100 Part410 orHD 384 4 41 S2 Deviations of the mains voltage from the rated value must not exceed the tolerance limits given in the specifications otherwise this may cause malfunction and dangerous operation MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com Emergency stop devices complying with IEC EN 60204 1 must be effective in all operating modes of the automation devices Unlatching the emergency stop devices must not cause restart Devices that are designed for mounting in housings or control cabinets must only be operated and controlled after they have been installed with the housing closed Desktop or portable units must only be operated and controlled in enclosed housings E T N Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of programs interrupted after a voltage dip or failure This should not cause dangerous operating states even for a short time If necessary emergency stop devices should be implemented Wherever faults in the automation system may cause damage to persons or property external measures must be implemented to ensure a Safe operating state in the event of a fault or malfunction for example by means of separate limit switches mechanical interlocks etc For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N
213. laying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts BVO1ZE to BV32ZE ZERO zero bit value on output function block is equal to zero Coils The Boolean operation function block does not have coils Memory requirement Boolean operation function block The Boolean operation function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs 184 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Function of Boolean operation function block The function block creates the operation depending on the operating mode If you program a negative value e g 10dec the CPU will Example form the two s complement of the amount 10dec 10000000000000000000000000001010pin Two s complement 1112 1111111111111111111111110110pin FF FF FF F 6hex Bit 32 is the signed bit and remains as 1 AND Boolean operation Value P11 Value I Result QV gt OR Boolean operation Value P11 Value Id Result QV gt XOR Boolean operation Value P11 Value I Result QV gt 13219dec 001100111010 0011 pin 57193dec 110111110110 1001 pin 4897 dec 000100110010 0001pin 13219dec 001100111010 0011 pin 57193dec 110111110110 1001 pin 65515dec 111111111110 1011 pin 13219dec 001100111010 0011 pin 57193dgec 110111110110 1001p i 60618dec 111011001100 1010pin MN05013005E F
214. ledge whether you want to configure the system Press the OK button The message on the left appears Th TSORATION AINET LEDs on the stations which are assigned station PROGRESS numbers higher than 1 2 to 8 switch to the OFF state of EZ NET As soon as the configuration has been successfully completed the NET LEDs onall stations flash The EZ NET network is ready for operation An error message will appear if a station is assigned a Station address which does not correspond to the physical location in the station list zec theron rey lf you want to overwrite the station address press the OK button The configuration can be aborted by pressing the ESC CONFIGURATION button CONFIGURATION MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 99 Commissioning E T N Changing the EZ NET network configuration The configuration of the EZ NET network can be modified at any time at station 1 physical location 1 gt The NET parameters are modified as described for inputting parameters for the first time Station addresses in the STATIONS menu are changed as follows Go to the physical location which is to be modified Press the OK button Existing station numbers can only be modified to free non assigned station numbers If all eight numbers are assigned all station numbers which are to be modified must be set to zero Thereafter all station numbers can be reassigne
215. les Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Bit Display 01 Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the activation of the bit display exclusively via the associated variable The first screen contains four bit display elements These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A make contact bit logic is selected for setting the bit display elements to the state of the corresponding outputs on off Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Figure 149 Bit display and static text Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of the bit display with overlaid static text exclusively via the associated variable Screen 2 contains four bit display elements These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A make contact bit logic is selected for setting the bit display elements to the state of the corresponding outputs on off The bit display is overlaid partly with static texts 288 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Screen overview Bit Log Bit Log Make cnt Make cnt Figure 150 Bit display with overlaid static text Screen 3 Screen 3 illustrates the possible uses of the Visibility tab for the bit display In this screen a bit display element has been enlarged to the full size of the screen It is activated via the Boolean oper
216. lize the optimum brilliance of the display Delay times for inputs and outputs The time from reading the inputs and outputs to switching contacts in the circuit diagram can be setin EZD via the delay time This function is useful for example in order to ensure a clean switching signal despite contact bounce S1 COOYYGY v i Figure 189 EZD input assigned a switch 390 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Delay times for inputs and outputs Delay times for the EZD inputs The delay time for DC signals is 20 ms A I c l Figure 190 Delay times for EZD DC An input signal S1 must therefore be 15 V or 8 V for at least 20 ms on the input terminal before the switch contact will change from 0 to 1 A If applicable this time must also include the cycle time B since EZD does not detect the signal until the start of a cycle The same debounce delay C applies when the signal drops out from 1 to 0 If you use high speed counter function blocks the debounce delay time for the inputs is 0 025 ms Otherwise itis not possible to count high speed signals If the debounce is switched off EZD responds to an input Signal after just 0 25 ms a 1A C1 ee Figure 191 Switching behavior with input debounce disabled MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 391 Inside EZD E TeN Typical delay times with the debounce delay dis
217. lly or diagonally This is done by dragging a selection handle of the element frame with the left mouse button held down Associated variable tab defines the Boolean variable for activating the bit display Visibility tab option for making the elementinvisible by means of an associated variable The bit display is always output as a solid image The invisible function is the only option available If there is an overlap of elements the bit display that was inserted first is positioned at the back and the last one at the front This can be modified for the activated screen element in the toolbar Move to foreground background buttons Large bit displays require a large amount of processor capacity and should be avoided in time critical applications MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 287 Visualization with EZD E T N Example program 1 associated variable and visibility The program consists of five screens thatcan be selected with the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button Editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 The screens show examples of the use of both associated variable and visibility elements The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LED 3 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time Examp
218. m 241 Programming wiring E T N Wiring of a numerical converter A numerical converter in the circuit diagram only has the enable coil I NCDZEN Figure 125 EZD circuit diagram with numerical converter Parameter display and parameter set for the numerical converter HCt2 Numerical converter function block number 02 ECD Convert BCD code to decimal value mode Appears in the parameter display Mi Input value Qs Output value In the parameter display of a numerical converter you can change the mode and the enable of the parameter display Numerical converter modes Mode Convert BCD coded values to decimal values HCO Eco ri GUY Parameter ECO EIH Convert decimal value to BCD coded values Number range Value Number system 161061273 to 161061273 BCD 9999999 to 9999999 Decimal 242 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks BCD code Decimal value 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 to 1111 Not permissible 10000 10 10001 11 oO o S DD MO A wj N e mS The BCD code only allows the number range Onex to 9hex The number range Ahex to F hex cannot be represented The NC function block converts the impermissible range to 9 Inputs The function block input I 1 can be assigned the following operands
219. m 301 Visualization with EZD E T N Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible by means of an associated variable Example numerical value The program consists of nine screens that can be selected via the Cursor buttons and v The screen change is defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Numerical Viaues 302 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Screen 1 This screen shows six simple output formats of the numerical values and provides an overview of the Number range format properties The first screen shows six numerical values These are associated with the on delayed timing relay T04 Associated variable tab for which a time range of 4 seconds is set The actual value of the timing relay is provided atits QV output FB parameter which is then displayed in the appropriate number format The variable type of the associated variable is DWord Table 11 Numerical value and output formats Left column Right column Numerical value 1 Numerical value 1 e Value range 0 to 50000 e Value range 0 to 4000 Unit None e Unit None Scaling range None Scaling range 0 to 4 Always show sign No Decimal places 0 e Always show sign No Numerical value 2 Numerical value 2 e Value range 0 to
220. me switch relays will no longer continue to switch The contacts are kept open when de energized Refer to Chapter Technical data Page 407 for information on the buffer time MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 229 Programming wiring E T N Wiring of a year time switch A year time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram as a contact HVID 1 15 U8 Figure 120 EZD circuit diagram with year time switch Parameter display and parameter set for the year time switch HVaD E wy roH OFF H30 Year time switch function block number 30 E Time switch channel B Appears in the parameter display 0H Switch on time 0FF Switch off time Channels 4 channels are available per time switch channels A B C and D These channels all act on the contact of the year time Switch Date Day Month Y ear DD MM YY Example 11 11 02 On off switch points ON switch on time OFF switch off time The switch on year must not be later than the switch off year Otherwise the year time switch will not function Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled 230 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Contacts HY01Q1 to HY 32Q1 Memory requirement for the year time switch The year time switch function block requir
221. messages I0 ID Meili 345 COM slave diagnostics messages 110 110 ileal 351 Function blocks Analog value comparator function Ax gi Ax GH x 01 32 158 block Function blocks Ax CY Ax cv MED1 d2 158 Analog value comparator Value overflow CARRY Arithmetic value overflow CARRY AR x Cy AR X CY MEDi d2 161l function block Zero arithmetic value zero function AR X ZE AR X ZE MEDi d2 161 block Data block comparator function block EC Ei EC x Ei KeDi d2 165 error number of elements exceeded Data block comparator function block EC E EC x Ee Keli d2 165 error range overlap Data block comparator function block EC EJ EC x E x 01 J32 165 error invalid offset Data block comparator function block EC X EQ BC X EQ MED1 92 172 comparison result Data block comparator function block ET Ei BT X El MED1 92 172 error number of elements exceeded 122 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Con tact Data block transfer function block error range overlap Make contact ET Ee Break contact x Ee EZD operation Number RED Page 172 Data block transfer function block error invalid offset ET Ed pa m uu REO 172 Boolean operation function block value zero EY x ZE a ca F4 m REO 183 Counter f value exceeded Ove rflow unction block upper setpoint C x OF mie
222. moothing filter You can integrate a signal smoothing filter into your circuit as a coil H 4 E FTI 1EN Figure 113 EZD circuit diagram with smoothing function block Parameter display and parameter set for the FT function block FT11 FT PT1 signal smoothing filter function block number 17 Appears in the parameter display i Input value TG Recovery time KF Proportional gain Gt Output value smoothed The recovery time Tg is the time in which the output value is calculated The recovery time Tg must be set so that it is an integer multiple of the cycle time or controller scan time Te Inputs The function block inputs 11 12 and KF can have the following operands Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs I1A01 to 1404 IA01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block 220 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Output The function block output can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Value range for inputs and outputs Value range Resolution unit HH Input value of the function 32 768 to 32767 block Ta Recovery time Tg 0 to 65535 in 100 ms EF Proportional gain Kp 0 to 65535 in GM Output value 32 768 to
223. mouse button depressed The height and width of the element frame is variable and can be adjusted accordingly by enlarging or reducing the screen element frame vertically horizontally or diagonally This is done holding down the left mouse button and dragging a selection handle of the element frame The side ratios of the original graphic are retained when you use the diagonal zoom function Display tab The Display tab provides the following display formats for the bitmap MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 295 Visualization with EZD E T N e Flashing via associated variable Background transparent or covered Inverted Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Example program 1 Bitmap display The program consists of eight screens thatcan be selected by the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 This program uses simple examples to explain the bitmap display options available Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Bitmap _01 Display Screen 1 Small Screen 1 shows a bitmap without any particular features Fae small display fu Screen 2 Screen 2 contains a bitmap in large display format The Bitmap flashing field of the Display tab shows an association
224. moved the mechanical locking feature must be undone BJ MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 75 Installation E T N z Z Ug Figure 58 Plugging and unplugging cables Connecting the serial The EZD power supply CPU module is provided with a multi interface function interface This can be used to set up point to point communication between different devices The interface is also used for connecting EZS oft The following device configurations are possible EZD with EZD EZD with EZ800 The serial interface must be implemented using special cables The standard EZD 800 CAB cable is 2 m in length The EZD 800 CAB cable must not be lengthened in order ensure compliance with EMC requirements 76 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Connecting the serial interface Figure 59 Fitting removing the interface cover Remove the interface cover or other plugs from the interface P Fit the connectors in the devices MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 77 78 06 04 AWB2528 1480GB 7 l Figure 60 Fitting the connection plug It must be ensured in all circumstances that the connector with the marking POW Side is fitted in the interface of the EZD device The serial interface only functions if the EZD device is providing the power feed required for the i
225. n be operated with retentive actual values Data function blocks A user definable consistent data function block range can be operated with retentive actual values 378 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N RUH MODE CARO MODE LIGHTING Retention Timing relays A user definable and consistent range for timing relays can be run with retentive actual values Requirements In order to make data retentive the relevant markers and function blocks must have been declared as retentive Attention The retentive data is saved every time the power supply is switched off and read every time the device is switched on The data integrity of the memory is guaranteed for 1010 read write cycles Setting retentive behavior Requirement EZD must be in STOP mode Switch to the System menu IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 The default setting of EZD is forno retentive actual value data to be selected When EZD is in STOP mode or has been switched to a de energized state all actual values are cleared Switch to STOP mode Switch to the System menu Proceed to the SYSTEM menu and continue to the RETENTION menu Press the OK button MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 379 EZD Settings
226. n block Parameter display and parameter set for the master reset MRIB amp t function block MFif Master reset function block number 16 a Reset outputs mode Appears in the parameter display 240 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Operating modes Q Acts on the outputs Q Q S S SN QA0L network station address e M acts on the marker range MDO1 to MD48 ALL acts on Q and M Contacts MR01Q1 to MR32Q1 The contact switches on the marker if the trigger coil MR T has the 1 state Coils MROIT to MR 32T trigger coils Memory requirement of the data function block The master reset function block requires 20 bytes of memory Function of the data master reset The outputs or the markers are set to the 0 state in accordance with the operating mode when a rising edge is detected on the trigger coil The master reset function block should be used as the last function block in a program so that all data ranges are cleared reliably Otherwise subsequent function blocks may overwrite the data ranges The contacts MR01Q1 to MR32Q1 assume the state of their own trigger coil Numerical converters EZD provides 32 numerical converters NC01 to NC32 A numerical converter function block enables you to convert BCD coded values to decimal values or decimal coded values to BCD coded values MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical co
227. n the button editor of the EZSoft with appropriate functions which overwrite the basic button functions Carry out the following steps to associate the buttons of the EZD Select an operable screen element Display backlight Screen change Password logout Set variable to fixed value Increment variable Decrement variable Changeover relay Select an operable screen element Ifa screen with a value entry is present you can jump to these value entry elements directly The value entry element is in Entry mode so that you can change the value directly Display backlight The brightness of the display backlight can be adjusted in stages Screen change This function enables the operator to change to other saved screens during operation If the operator is to be able to move between several screens using a button function you must assign a screen change button element to an operator button in each of these masks MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 331 Visualization with EZD E T N Password logout The Screen overview contains the Passwords tab for defining a logout time This logout time is skipped with the Password logout function Set variable to fixed value This function assigns a fixed value to the selected variable such as for resetting to a defined value Increment variable The variable value is increased by the set step width Decrement variable The variable value
228. n the circuit diagram forms a rung With the EZD up to 256 rungs can be wired in a circuit diagram MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 133 Programming wiring E T N Contact fields 1 to 4 Coil field 5 Rung I li I Dem reer io seecee Ce li 3 Di H 1101 SERRREE EEREEEE Gee BEEEEEE BEEEEEE EEEEEEE EEEEEEE EEEEEEEE Status line L 1 C N Bio Number of rung Connections Number of Amount of free field in the memory in bytes rung Connections are used to produce the electrical contact between relay contacts and the coils They can be created across several rungs Each point of intersection is a connection The number of free bytes is displayed so that you can recognize how much memory is available for the circuit diagram and function blocks EZD circuit diagram display For greater legibility the circuit diagram display of the EZD I Di I D2 shows two contacts per rung or one contact plus a coil in g O1 HY O14 series A total of 16 characters per rung and three rungs plus the status line can be displayed simultaneously L 4 0 4 B 7840 you can move between the contact fields with the lt gt cursor buttons The number of the rung and the contact are displayed in the lower status line gt The circuit diagram display performs two functions e In STOP mode itis used to edit the circuit
229. nal for operating another device In this operating mode you are thus able to remotely control all devices supporting Terminal mode operation The interface to the other device can be implemented using the serial interface orEZ NET _ gt TERMINAL MODE operation is only possible if the EZD is inSTOP mode Permanent TERMINAL MODE setting In the SYSTEM menu you set the EZD to start in TERMINAL MODE when the power supply is switched on Switch to the System menu gt IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 Activating an automatic startup in TERMINAL MODE Requirement The EZD is in RUN or STOP mode without visualization the System menu must be reachable MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 375 EZD Settings F BUTTONS RUM MODE CARO MODE TERM TING _ F BUTTONS RUH MODE CARO MODE E T N Select TERMINAL MODE in the System menu and press OK The next time that the EZD is started it will establish the connection to the selected device Press ESC to return to the Status display The correct station number must be selected in order for the EZD to start TERMINAL MODE with the correct station chapter Commissioning Page 83 Deactivating an automatic startup in TERMINAL MODE Select TERMINAL MODE and press OK The a
230. nce The last coil in the circuit diagram determines the status of the relay Exception When working with jumps the same coil can be used twice Coil with contactor function T The output signal follows immediately after the input signal and the relay acts as a contactor Figure 89 Signal diagram of contactor function Impulse relay J The relay coil switches whenever the input signal changes from 0 to 1 The relay behaves like a bistable flip flop Figure 90 Signal diagram of impulse relay 152 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Working with contacts and relays A coil is automatically switched off if the power fails and if STOP mode is active Exception R etentive coils retain signal 1 see Section Retention Page 378 Set and Reset F coil function The Set S and Reset F coil functions are normally used in pairs The relay picks up when the coil is set A and remains in this State until it is reset B by the coil function The supply voltage is switched off C the coil does not have a retentive effect on wae e Eo I I i i ees R i Vv l i 1 i i i I I i i a a a E E Figure 91 Signal diagram of Set and Reset If both coils are triggered atthe same time priority is given to the coil in the circuit diagram with the higher rung number This is
231. nd covered so as to prevent accidental contact The installation must comply with regulations for electromagnetic compatibility EMC The power up of the EZD must not cause any hazards arising from activated devices such as unexpected motor startups or power ups Improper use EZD should not be used as a substitute for safety related controls such as burner or crane controls emergency stop or two hand safety controls MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 11 EZD E T N Overview EZD is an electronic HMI unit and control relay with the following features e Logic functions Timing relay and counter functions Time switch functions Arithmetic functions PID controllers Operator and display functions EZD is a display HMI control and input device in one With EZD you can create solutions for domestic applications as well as for tasks in machine and plant construction EZD is a modular and flexible device The integral EZ NET network enables the connection of up to eight EZ NET stations to form a single control system Each EZ NET station can contain a program This allows the design of systems using high speed controllers with decentralized intelligence In Terminal mode the EZD can be used to control any device in the network and display data from it regardless of whether itis an EZ800 or an EZD In this mode the EZD makes its keypad and display available to the other device
232. ndo setting from previous OK Exit current display or menu Change add contact relay Save setting Terminal mode on off MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 117 Programming wiring E T N Operating principles The cursor buttons in the EZD circuit diagram perform three functions The current mode is indicated by the appearance of the flashing cursor Move Entering Connect ii In Move mode you can use v lt gt to move the cursor around the circuit diagram in order to select a rung contact or relay coil Use OK to switch to Entry mode so that you can enter or change a value at the current cursor position If you press ESC in Entry mode EZD will undo the most recent changes IO Press ALT to switch to Connect mode for wiring contacts and relays Press ALT again to return to Move Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram and parameter display gt EZD performs many of these cursor movements automatically For example EZD switches the cursor to Move mode if no further entries or connections are possible at the selected cursor position Opening the parameter display for function blocks with contacts or coils If you specify the contact or coil of a function relay type in Entry mode EZD automatically switches from the contact number to the function block parameter display when you press OK Press gt to switch to the next contact or coil field without entering any parameters
233. ng mode change RUN STOP Voltage On Off Delete program Change program Load new program All these actions do not delete the actual value of the operating hours counter Accuracy The operating hours counter is accurate to the nearest minute If the enable coil signal is terminated within a minute the value for seconds is lost The value range of the operating hours counter is between 0 hours and 100 years PUT send a value onto the network The function block allows you to selectively send a 32 bit value onto the network The PUT function block provides data on the EZ NET that another station indicates it requires via the GET function block Figure 127 EZD circuit diagram with PUT function block 248 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N FTO 1i I Function blocks Parameter display and parameter set for the PUT function block FTOI PUT function block places a value onto the network number 11 Does not appear in the parameter display HH Setpoint value which is put onto the EZ NET network Input The function block input I 1 can be assigned the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs A01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 7 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Contacts PT01Q1 to PT32Q1 state of the trigger coil Coil
234. ng wiring E T N I Df fe eee OY I gims L 001 C i RUH Figure 86 Power flow display In the power flow display energized connections are thicker than non energized connections You can follow a current carrying connection across all rungs by scrolling the display up and down The bottom right of the power flow display indicates that the controller is in RUN mode gt Section Power flow display with Zoom function P age 93 The power flow display will not show signal fluctuations in the millisecond range This is due to the inherent delay factor of LCD displays Function block editor The EZD has the FUNCTION RELAYS menu in order to edit the function blocks without circuit diagrams The function blocks are an inherent component of the program 146 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Working with contacts and relays Calling the function blocks via the FUNCTION RELAYS menu Function special function parameter display Displays the function blocks BBE HEE BEE E used ZEEE EEE EEEE purentcusor y 04 E EEE Free memory in bytes Figure 87 Explanation of the function block display Display of the function blocks for editing Unit special function Function Parameter display appears does not appear Function block number Function block name EEEE EEE EEE E Ii GEGEEEEEEEE Variable operand for gt If EE
235. nge 1 I1 MW40 Comparison range 2 I2 MW54 Number of bytes HO C Dim The value of C 01QV is 1024 This value is too big The value at MO can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the comparison ranges is outside of the permissible range is output BCO1E3 is 1 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 171 Programming wiring ETO INI I tI NO E T N Data block transfer EZD is provided with 32 function blocks BT01 to BT32 for transferring values from one marker range Copy data The marker ranges can be overwritten with a particular value data initialization The following marker types can be transferred and overwritten MB MW MD The function block is enabled in the circuit diagram I E BTDITK ETI JEI BTITE ETI 1E3 tM 4B Figure 99 EZD circuit diagram with enabling of transfer data block function block Parameter display and parameter set for a data block transfer function block ETDI Data block transfer function block number 07 INI INI mode initialize marker ranges Appears in the parameter display Mt Source range start ble Destination range start NO Number of elements to be written in bytes per range Value range 1 to 383 Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block 172 For more information visit www Eat
236. ngths are calculated for a known conductor cross section Imax Cable length in m S minimum cable cross section in mm pcu resistivity of copper if not otherwise stated 0 018 Qmm2 m S x 12 4 Pcu Imax m Plugging and unplugging network cables EZD is provided with two RJ 45 network sockets The socket 1 in the first station is for the bus terminating resistor For other stations socket 1 is used for plugging in the incoming cable Socket 2 is used for the outgoing cable or for the bus termination resistor on the last physical station in the network 74 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the NET network 1 Ea R1 12 51 8 2 1 12 CS Ve Q1 6 3 AS Interface i ES I 8 112 AN ei C so Q1 8 Figure 57 Bus termination resistors Firststation on the NET network Bus termination resistor Last station on the NET network Physical location place C Station number Both RJ 45 interfaces are visible after the cover plate has been removed When a cable is plugged in the mechanical connection must be audible click and visible 0 Before a plug or cable is re
237. nly in the circuit diagram 250 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Figure 129 EZD circuit diagram with pulse width modulation Parameter display and parameter set for pulse width Pull modulation wll SFD Fwgg Pulse width modulation function block number 02 SHE Appears in the parameter display SW Manipulated variable input FDO Period duration in ms HE Minimum on duration minimum off duration in ms The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify the period duration the minimum on time and the enabling of the parameter display Value and time ranges Parameter Value and time range Resolution ou 0 to 4095 1 digit Fo 0 to 65535 ms ME 0 to 65535 ms The minimum time setting for the period duration is 0 005 s 5 ms Inputs The function block inputs 54 FDO and HE can be assigned the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs A01 to I1A04 IA01 terminal 17 1402 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 251 Programming wiring E T N 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Contacts PW01E1 to PW02E1 the minimum on duration or the minimum off du
238. nsion of screen 3 For greater simplicity all the basic settings of the scaling range were taken from screen 3 Note the Numerical display setting in the Display change area of the Number range format tab Table 14 Numerical value extended analog value output Numerical Display of the analog value 0 to 1019 value 1 Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 2 range 0 to 10 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Always show sign yes Display change Detection via internal limit value comparison Numerical display flashing Numerical Display of the analog value with the scaling value 3 range 5 to 5 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Always show sign no Display change detection via internal limit value comparison Numerical value display inverted Analog input 13 Figure 0 Flashing 0 00V Invert 5 00V Figure 163 Extended analog value output 306 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Screen overview Screen 5 Screen 5 shows an example of the output of analog values here 1A3 on the display with the visibility option switched via 11 and 12 The settings for this were defined on the Visibility tab Two numerical values are shown on the screen that output the analog value in different formats These values are associated with analog input IA3 which provides a Word type variable for further processing Table
239. nterface cable E T N Expanding inputs outputs 200000000000 mo esa 20 00 oo d Figure 61 Point to point serial interface Expanding inputs outputs You can add expansion units to all EZD types with an EZ LINK connection in order to increase the number of inputs and outputs Expandable EZ basic Expansion units units EZD CP8 EZ618 RE 12 AC inputs 6 relay outputs EZ620 TE 12 DC inputs 8 transistor outputs EZ202 RE 2 relay outputs common Special expansion units for connecting to other bus systems are shown in the latest product catalog 1 Common supply for multiple outputs Local expansion Local expansion units are fitted directly next to the power supply CPU module with an EZ LINK connection MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 79 Installation E T N gt Connect the EZ expansion unit via the EZ LINK DS plug connector EZ LINK DS oa EZD CP8 Pi AE ZB RE EZ6 TE EZ2 Figure 62 Connecting local expansion units with EZD CP8 The following electrical separation is implemented between the power supply CPU module of the EZD device and the expansion unit Separation always in local connection of expansion unit e Simple isolation 400 V AC 10 Safe isolation 240 V AC 10 Units may be destro
240. nters can be used for measuring frequencies Y ou can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The high speed frequency counters are hardwired to the digital inputs 11 to 14 The CF frequency counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter frequency and pulse shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The minimum counter frequency is 4 Hz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 Measurement method The pulses on the input are counted for one second irrespective of the cycle time and the frequency is determined The result of the measurements made available as a value to the function block output CF QV Wiring of a counter The following assignment of the digital inputs apply e 1 counter input for the counter CF01 e 2 counter input for the counter CF 02 13 counter input for the counter CF 03 14 counter input for the counter CF 04 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 193 Programming wiring cro SH PEL BM E T N To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CF CH Cl counters only once Wiring of a frequency counter You integrate a frequency counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts I CFOiEN CFI 0F
241. o CIO2ZRE Reset actual value to zero e CIOLSE to CI02SE Accept preset actual value with rising edge Memory requirement of the counter relay The high speed counter function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention High speed counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu Ifa counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off IfEZD is started in RUN mode the counter relay operates with the retentively saved actual value 206 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Function of the high speed incremental encoder counter function block A _ B petite mja E mja F Figure 107 Signal diagram of high speed incremental encoder counter 1 counter input channel A 2 counter input channel B 3 upper setpoint value 5H 4 preset actual value 34 5 lower setpoint value 5L 6 counter enable MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 207 Programming wiring E T N 7 accept preset actual value coil Cl EN 8 reset coil Cl RE 9 contact make contact Cl OF upper setpoint value reached exceeded 10 contact make contact C1 FB lower setpoint value re
242. o the Status display and press pushbutton actuator S1 The contacts for inputs I1 and 12 are activated and relay Q1 picks up This is indicated on the numbers which are displayed Power flow display EZD allows you to check rungs in RUN mode This means that you can check your circuit diagram via the built in power flow display while it is being processed by the EZD gt Change to the Circuit diagram display and press pushbutton actuator S1 The relay picks up EZD shows the power flow eee A ol L 1 C 4 RUN Figure 69 Power flow display Inputs 11 and 12 are closed relay Q1 has picked up visible area 92 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Creating your first circuit diagram Press pushbutton actuator S2 thathas been connected as a break contact The rung is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out I 0i 02 Ce L 1 C 1 RUM Figure 70 Power flow display Input 1 is closed input 12 is open relay Q1 has dropped out visible area Press ESC to return to the Status display With EZD you can test parts of a circuit diagram before it is entirely completed EZD simply ignores any incomplete wiring that is not yet working and only runs the finished wiring Power flow display with Zoom function EZD enables you to check the following at a glance all four contacts plus one coil in series and 3 rungs gt Change to
243. ock number 02 i li UNF Unipolar mode KF Appears in the parameter display TH My Setpoint of PID controller TL PT Mi Actual value of PID controller TC HU KF Proportional gain Kp TIF TH Reset time Tp TU Rate time Ty 214 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Parameter UNF Function blocks TC Scan time MY Manual manipulated variable BM Manipulated variable In the parameter display of a PID controller you set the operating mode the setpoints and enable the parameter display Operating modes of the PID controller Manipulated variable is output as Unipolar 12 bit value 0 to 4095 BIF Bipolar 13 bit value signed 12 bit value 4096 to 4095 Inputs The function block inputs I1 I2 EF 7TH TY TC and MM can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs A01 to 1A04 IA01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 215 Programming wiring E T N Value range for inputs and outputs Value range Resolution unit gt l Setpoint of PID controller 32 768 to 32767 gt 2 A
244. ogram memory Screen 4 Circuit Screen 3 diagram Screen 2 Screen 4 TT Figure 148 Memory division EZD The maximum size of the program memory is 8 KByte This memory area is used to store the circuit diagram and also reserves enough space for displaying the largest screen The screen memory has a total memory capacity of 24 KByte which is used in this memory area to store all the screens created It should therefore be ensured that screens have the lowest possible memory requirement so that enough space is available in the program memory for the largest screen and the circuit diagram If a circuit diagram is not required the memory requirement of the largest screen must not exceed the 8 KByte limit The EZSoft status bar indicates the available memory the available screen memory and the required memory for the active screen element If the available memory is exceeded the indicator will turn red 278 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Western European character table Screens Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning 0 28 56 8 84 T 1 29 57 9 85 U 2 30 58 86 V 3 31 59 87 W 4 32 Blank 60 lt 88 X 5 33 61 89 Y 6 34 5 62 gt 90 Z 7 35 63 91 8 36 64 92 9 37 65 A 93 10 38 amp 66 B 94 a 11 39 67 C 95 i 12 40 68 D 96 13 41 69 E 97 a 14 42 x 7
245. oil is automatically switched off if the power fails and if the device is in STOP mode Exception Retentive coils retain signal 1 see Section Retention Page 378 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 155 Programming wiring E T N Function blocks The function blocks are used to simulate some of the devices used in conventional open loop and closed loop control systems EZD provides the following function blocks Analog value comparator threshold controller only with EZD 24 V DC variants Arithmetic addition subtraction multiplication division Compare data blocks Transfer data blocks Boolean operation Counters up and down counters with upper and lower threshold values preset frequency counters high speed counters incremental encoder counters Comparators Text output freely editable texts enter values Data function block PID controllers Smoothing filters Value scaling Pulse width modulator Read GET data from the EZ NET Time switches weekday time year month day date Numerical converters Master reset Operating hours counter Write PUT data to the EZ NET Synchronization of date and time via the EZ NET Timing relays on delayed on delayed with random switching 156 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks off delayed also retriggerable off delayed with random swi
246. om MN05013005E E T N Hi Function blocks Inputs The function block inputs gt It 5H and 5L canbe assigned the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs A01 to IA04 IA01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Value range for inputs and outputs Value range Input value 2147483648 to 2147483647 23H Upper limit value PSL Lower limit value GU Output value Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu Access enabled Access disabled Coil VCO1EN to VC32EN function block enable MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 271 Programming wiring E T N Memory requirement of the value limitation function block The value limitation function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the value limitation function block The function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil VC EN is active If coil VC EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to Zero The value is accepted at input VC I1 if the enable coil is active If the value is greater than the upper limit value
247. omly switches within the set value range Retriggering When the time is running and the trigger coil is reactivated or deactivated the actual value is reset to zero The set time of the timing relay is timed out once more MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 263 Programming wiring E T N Figure 135 Signal diagram of off delayed timing relay with without random switching with without retriggering 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 t setpoint time Range A The time elapses after the trigger coil is deactivated Range B The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing Range C The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact After the Resetcoil drops out the relay continues to work normally Range D The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact when the function block is timing out 264 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks TIE A T m I ot pem Ys W Y Figure 136 Signal diagram of off delayed timing relay with without random switching with without retriggering Range E The Trigger coil drops out twice The set time t consists of plus switch function not retriggerable Range F The Trigger coil drops out twice
248. on P M determines which percentage of the manipulated variable has no effect The minimum on duration must be set as low as possible so that the P M ratio is as high as possible If the minimum on duration must not be too low due to the output relay the period duration must be increased accordingly The minimum on duration is 1 ms If the actual value of the pulse length is less than the minimum on duration the minimum on duration has the effect of the pulse time Note the state of the contact PW E1 If the off duration of the pulse is less than the minimum off duration outputs Q1 and Q2 are continuously in operation Note the state of the contact PW E1 Setting date time This function block allows you to selectively place the date and time onto the network All other stations accept the date and time of the sending station The function block name is SC01 send clock Hl Gili E SCNT Figure 130 EZD circuit diagram with SC function block MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 253 Programming wiring E T N Parameter display and parameter set for the SC function block The SC01 function block has no parameters as itis a triggered system service Coil SCO1T trigger coil Memory requirement of the SC function block The SC function block requires 20 bytes of memory SC diagnostics The SC function block only functions when the EZ NET
249. on determining the capability of the device concerned EZD enables the display of the following device information AC or DC power supply T transistor output or R relay output C clock provided A analog output provided e LCD display provided EZ NET EZ NET provided OS 1 10 204 operating system version CRC 25825 checksum of the operating system Switch to the System menu aS IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 Select the SYSTEM menu ania Press the OK button MENU LANGUAGE COMPIGURATOR Use the button to select the INFORMATION menu and CARD MODE press OK DISPLAY RETENTION This will display all device information INFORMATION Example EZD 80 B EZD CP8 NT EZD TA17 OC TCR LOCO HET Of d di dit CRC amp 31b3 382 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Displaying device information Example EZD 80 B EZD CP8 ME EZD R16 DC FC LOD OS dated Display in STOP mode CRO 63163 Display in RUN mode DC RC LOD Os ddd The CRC checksum is not displayed CRC Press ESC to leave the display CARO MODE DISPLAY RETENTION MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 383 E T N 8 Inside EZD EZD
250. on to enter the WRITE range Enter the WRITE range Press ESC to leave the entry menu The COM LINK has now been set No COM settings are required at the remote station Press ESC to return to the Status display The entry in the second COM line indicates that the COM connection is active For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Terminal mode Terminal mode Terminal mode The EZD device als operating mode Thi o supports the TERMINAL MODE s allows you to remotely control other devices This is especially useful if the other device is located in an inaccessible p ace Terminal mode can also be used to show the menus and displays of devices that do not have their own display or oper both with the serial ating unit Terminal mode can be used interface and in the EZ NET The serial interface enables you to access a remote device If you use the EZ NET network all other network stations can be addressed Terminal mode is this mode to be a a separate operating mode like RUN mode It only functions when a program is not running For ctive the EZD must be in STOP mode aS All connected devices must also support Terminal mode The following topologies are permissible MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 107 Commissioning E T N Terminal mode using the point to point serial interface
251. onE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Operating modes of the transfer data block function block Parameter Function INI Initialize marker ranges cry Copy marker ranges Inputs The function block inputs 11 I2 and HQ can have the following operands e Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs 1A01 to I1A04 1A01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Specifying the marker range without offset If MB MW or MD markers are specified both at I1 and at I2 the number of markers defines the source or destination range Specifying a marker range with offset If you wish to work with an offset specify one of the following variables at function block input I4 ore Constant Actual value QV of a function block e Analog input lA Analog output QA The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MBO1 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 173 Programming wiring E T N Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts BTO1E1 to BT32E1 the number of marker bytes exceeds the source or destination range BT01E2 to BT32E2 source and destination range overlap Only valid for CPY mode copy marker ranges BTO1E3 to BT32E3 the specified offset is invalid Coils BTO1T_ to BT32T
252. or less than the lower limit value the respective limit value is output at VC QV Example with timing relay and counter function block A warning light flashes when the counter reaches 10 In the example both function blocks C 01 and T 01 are wired Counter 2s Figure 144 Hardwiring with relays 272 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks I Di I D2 DiJo I rcnic I iC HRE I iT HEN T 11 rad Figure 146 EZD wiring and circuit diagram Entering function block parameters from the circuit diagram You can access the parameter entry from the contact as well as from a coil gt Enter the circuit diagram up to E 01 as a coil MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 273 Programming wiring E T N C TC is the counter coil of the counter 01 function block I Ecc I h CC HRE T HEH T H i reo Figure 147 EZD wiring and circuit diagram gt Keep the cursor on the number Press the OK button gt If the cursor is on the contact number EZD will call up the parameter display when you p
253. or more information visit www EatonElectrical com 185 Programming wiring E T N NOT Boolean operation Value I1 13219dec 0000 00000000 00000011001110100011pin Value Iz2 Omitted ResultQV gt 13220dec 11111111111111111100110001011100pin The NOT operation operates according to the following rules 11 positive value Negate value of I1 and subtract 1 FT 1 312 11 Negative value Value of 11 and subtract 1 PTi 1 3T2 Counters EZD provides 32 up down counters from C 01 to C 32 The counter relays allow you to count events Y ou can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value To specify a Start value for example counting from the value 1200 this can be implemented using a C counter The C counters are cycle time dependent Wiring of a counter You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram 186 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N c l 3H PSL Ya BM Function blocks NOAA aeRee Sms Figure 100 EZD circuit diagram with counter relay Parameter display and parameter set for the counter relay C20 Counter relay function block number 20 Appe
254. ord analog inputs and outputs word or function block inputs outputs DWord as associated variables In the List of activation values you define whether the screen is to be activated by the associated variable and the value at which this is done If the Force screen change check box is activated the EZD device will immediately abort every job started and activate this mask when the value of the associated variable triggers it This could mean for example that value entries macros for processing functions after pressing an operator button and also password entries are aborted This can be useful for outputting appropriate alarm messages gt Unsaved entries will therefore be lostifa screen is activated that is associated with a particular event and the Force screen change option is active In this case while the associated variable is set by the program itis also not possible to carry outa screen change via the keypad In the List of activation values you can select whether the screen is to be activated by the set variable and at which value 282 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Screen editor You process the individual screens in the Screen editor This provides the following different screen elements for selection Static text Bit display Date and time Bitmap e Numerical value Value entry e Message text These screen el
255. ore information visit www EatonElectrical com 139 Programming wiring E T N Press ALT to switch to Connect mode Use lt gt to move the diagonal arrow between the contact fields and coil fields and to move between rungs Press ALT to leave Connect mode EZD will leave the mode automatically when you move the diagonal arrow onto a contact field or coil field which has already been assigned In a rung EZD automatically connects contacts and the terminal to the relay coil if there are no empty fields in between Never work backwards You will learn why wiring backwards does notwork in Section Effects on the creation of the circuit diagram on Page 388 Figure 80 Circuit diagram with five contacts invalid When wiring more than four contacts in series use one of the 96 M marker relays I li D4 I 03 ZM I 02 I D4 H 1i 0 02 Figure 81 Circuit diagram with M marker relay Deleting connections gt Move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field to the right of the connection that you want to delete Press ALT to Switch to Connect mode Press DEL EZD will delete a connection Closed adjacent connections will be retained 140 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Working with contacts and relays If several rungs are connected to one another EZD first deletes the vertical connection If you press
256. ore information visit www EatonElectrical com 413 Appendix Display operating unit E T N EZD 80 EZD80 B Power supply Power supply using power supply unit CPU EZD CP8 LCD display Type Graphic monochrome Visible area W x H mm 62 x 33 Size of pixels mm 0 4 x 0 4 Number of pixels W x H 132 x 64 Spacing pixel centre to pixel centre mm 0 42 LCD backlight Yes Backlight color Yellow green The backlight can be used and programmed in Yes visualization applications LEDs The backlight can be used and programmed in 2 visualization applications Operating buttons Number 9 Can be used and programmed in visualization 9 applications Mechanical lifespan de Actuations typ 1 x 106 Pushbutton illumination LED Number 5 Color Green 414 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data Power supply EZD CP8 Rated voltage Rated value V DC 24 20 15 Permissible range VDC 20 4 to 28 8 Residual ripple S5 Input current For 24 V DC EZD CP8 normally mA 125 For 24 V DC EZD CP8 EZD 80 normally mA 250 For 24 V DC EZD CP8 EZD 80 EZD R EZD T mA 270 normally Voltage dips IEC EN 61131 2 ms 10 Heat dissipation For 24 V DC EZD CP8 normally W 3 For 24 V DC EZD CP8 EZD 80 normally W 6 For 24 V DC EZD CP8 EZD 80 EZD R EZD T Ww 6 5 normally CPU
257. ou have to do is then connect any switches sensors lamps or contactors you wish to use LO1 m D p s Fy K1 2 pa K1 ui Figure 64 Lamp controller with relays L01 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 85 Commissioning E T N In the following example EZD carries out all the wiring and performs the tasks of the circuit diagram shown below I Di I i 8 01 Figure 65 Lamp controller with EZD 86 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Parerea I F MO 02 00 iraton STOF gt PARAMETERS SET CLOCK FUNCTION RELAYS Creating your first circuit diagram Starting point Status display When you switch on EZD it opens the Status display immediately to show the switching state of the inputs and outputs It also indicates whether the EZD is already running a program Note If another display is visible a visualization screen is shown The examples were written without the use of expansion units If an expansion unit is connected the Status display will first show the status of the basic unitand then the status of the expansion unit before showing the first selection menu Press OK to switch to the main menu Press OK to switch to the next menu level and press ESC
258. p behavior with memory card is for applications where unskilled personnel change the memory card under no voltage conditions EZD only starts in the Run mode if a memory card with a valid program is inserted If the program on the memory card is different to the program in EZD the program from the card is loaded into EZ and EZ Starts in RUN mode Switch to the System menu IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 Activation of card mode Requirement RUN MODE is active IfEZD displays CARD MODE this means that when the power supply is switched on EZD will only start in RUN mode if a memory card with a valid program has been inserted P Otherwise select CARD MODE and press OK EZD will start up with the program on the card Press ESC to return to the Status display 374 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Startup behavior Deactivation of card mode DEBOUNCE pselectCARD MODE lt and press OK eee The RUN mode function is deactivated RUN MODE f CARO MODE The EZD default setting is for display of the CARD MODE menu i e EZD starts in RUN mode without the memory card when the power is switched on Terminal mode The EZD also supports the TERMINAL MODE Terminal mode enables the display and the keypad of the EZD to be used as a termi
259. playing the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts e CHOLOF to CHO4OF Actual value Upper setpoint e CHO1FB to CHO4FB Actual value S Lower setpoint e CHO1ZE to CHO4ZE Actual value Zero CHOLCY to CHO4CY Value range exceeded MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 199 Programming wiring E T N Coils CHO1EN to CHO4EN enable of the counter CHO01D to CHO4D count direction definition Status 0 count upwards Status 1 count downwards CHOIRE to CHO4RE reset actual value to zero CHOISE to CHO4SE accept preset actual value with rising edge Memory requirement of the high speed counter The high speed counter function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention High speed counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu Ifa counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off IfEZD is started in RUN mode the counter relay operates with the retentively saved actual value 200 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E Function blocks Function of the high speed counter function block C Figure 105 Signal diagram of high
260. point e CFO1FB to CFO4FB Actual value lt Lower setpoint e CFO1ZE to CF04ZE Actual value Zero Coils CFO1EN to CFO4EN enable of the counter with coil status 1 Memory requirement of the frequency counter The frequency counter function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention The frequency counter does not retain actual values as the frequency is remeasured continuously MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 195 Programming wiring E T N Function of the frequency counter function block Lt oe T ed a a Figure 103 Signal diagram of frequency counter 1 counter input 11 to 14 2 upper setpoint value 5H 3 lower setpoint value 5L 4 enable CF EN 5 contact make contact CF OF upper setpoint value exceeded 6 contact make contact CF FB lower setpoint value undershot 7 actual value equal to zero CF ZE ty gate time for the frequency measurement 196 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks e The first measurements are made after the CF EN enable signal has been activated The value is output after the gate time has timed out The contacts are set in accordance with the measured frequency e Ifthe CF EN enable signal is removed the output value is set to zero High speed counters EZD provides four high speed up down counters C
261. pses normally Figure 139 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 3 Range H The Reset signal interrupts the timing out of the set time MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 267 Programming wiring Timing relay single pulse oP df E T N man t s am lt a t s B EF t t t Figure 140 Signal diagram of timing relay single pulse 1 1 2 3 4 trigger coil T EN Range A stop coil T ST reset coil T RE switching contact make contact T Q1 The trigger signal is short and is lengthened Range B The Trigger signal is longer than the set time Range C The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time 268 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks SH ff t D E s gt Figure 141 Signal diagram of timing relay single pulse 2 Range D The Reset coil resets the timing relay Range E The Reset coil resets the timing relay The Trigger coil is still activated after the Reset coil has been deactivated and the time is still running Timing relay synchronous and asynchronous flashing Time value gt l1 Pulse time Time value gt l2 Pause time Synchronous symmetrical flashing gt 11 equal gt 12 Asynchronous flashing gt I1 not equal gt 12
262. quest for one screen The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The fourth screen contains a password request The individual screens can be selected with Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor Section Button editor Page 331 The defined password is requested when exiting screen 4 In this case itis the number 2 which has to be confirmed with OK Further scrolling through the screens cannot be done without entering the correct password You can leave the password request by pressing ESC which however will only move you back to the previous screen Examples Folder F iles can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Static_Text_02 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 285 Visualization with EZD E T N Four static texts arranged in rows Screen 4 Screen 4 shows three static texts arranged in rows Example program 3 different display formats with screen activation via a counter The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The individual screens are activated via counter C01 The counter s SH upper switch value is 5 The act
263. range selection PON Ti The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on the PUP 28 1st of each month and remain on until 23 59 on the 28th of each month Example 4 HDi A Holiday selection PON 28 12 The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on the OFF 26 12 25 12 each year and remain on until 23 59 on 26 12 Christmas program Example 5 Time range selection The year time switch HY 01 should switch on at 00 00 on 01 05 each year and remain on until 23 59 on the 31 10 Open air season Hi A Hi E PON 01 05 0H PORE POFF J1 10 232 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Example 6 Overlapping ranges The year time switch HY 01 channel A switches on at00 00 on the 3rd of the months 5 6 7 8 9 10 and remains on until Function blocks The year time switch HY 01 channel B switches on at 00 00 on the 2nd in the months 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 and remains on 23 59 on the 25th of these until 23 59 on 17th of these months months Hi A Hi E POM 049 05 POM D2 0b POFF 25 10 POFF 11 12 Total number of channels and behavior of the contact HY 01Q1 The time switch will switch on at 00 00 from the 3rd May and off at 23 59 on the 25th May In J une J uly August September October the time switch will switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd of the month and switch off at 23 59 on the 17th In November and De
264. ration was undershot Coils PWO1EN to PWO2EN enable coil Memory requirement of the function block The pulse width modulation function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the pulse width modulation function block The pulse width modulation function block mustbe enabled so that it can work Coil PW EN is active If coil PW EN is notactive the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero The manipulated variable at function block input gt SV is converted to a pulse string with a constant period duration The pulse width is proportional to the manipulated variable gt SV The period duration and the minimum on duration can be selected as required within the specified limits The function block causes a direct output of the pulse to the corresponding output The output image of the circuit diagram is always updated 252 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks The following applies if the output of a pulse width modulator is used as a coil in the circuit diagram The state of the output is not refreshed from the circuit diagram The following applies to the minimum on duration The minimum on duration is the same as the minimum off duration e The minimum on duration must not exceed 10 of the period duration The ratio of period duration minimum on durati
265. re sensitive to interference than digital signals Consequently more care must be taken when laying and connecting the signal lines Incorrect Switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 69 Installation Connecting servo valves E T N LO1 LO2 A s nEn L01 gt 1A A TODA A B _ Tos pool 5 BE Siepe Ase 24V ov OV M 12 2B 14 5 16 I7 181910 111112 OV OV QA1 Figure 53 Connecting servo valves Setpoint entry for a drive LO1 LO2 pi PES E L01 R gt 1A A A B oak Peale WAR I Ooo oe oD Bae o o0 o0 oe oo 2av ov OV 1 12 13 14 5 l6 I7 18 19110 111112 OV OV QA1 Figure 54 Setpoint entry for a drive 70 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the NET network Connecting the NET network EZD with network connection EZD CP NT can be used for creating the NET network Up to eight devices can be connected to this network Further information can
266. real time clock timing relay memory Backup accuracy of real time clock see graph 200 180 160 140 120 100 0 0123456 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Accuracy of the real time clock ul Per day s day ap Per year h year a 0 5 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 415 Appendix Repetition accuracy of timing relays E T N Accuracy of timing relay from value 0 02 Resolution Range s ms 5 Range M S S 1 Range H M min 1 Rung 256 Contacts in series 4 Coil per rung 1 Program memory for program circuit diagram kByte 8 Program memory for display objects visualization kByte 24 RAM working memory kByte 8 Storage of programs retentive FRAM Retentive memory retentive data FRAM non volatile Size Byte 200 Operating hours counter Byte 16 Write read cycles FRAM minimum 1010 416 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data EZD R EZD T Digital inputs Number 12 Inputs usable as analog inputs I7 18 111 112 4 Status display LCD status display if available Electrical isolation To supply voltage No Between each other No To the outputs Yes To
267. ress OK EN The first part of the parameter set of a counter is displayed 35H 1 gt Move the cursor gt over the character to the value input VEL behind 5H sa 3H means function block input upper counter setpoint value The character means thatthe parameters of this timing relay can be modified using the PARAMETERS menu gt Change the upper counter setpoint to 10 Use lt gt to move the cursor onto the tens digit Use to modify the value of the digit gt P ress OK to save the value and ESC to return to the circuit diagram gt EZD has specific parameter displays for the function blocks The meaning of these parameters is explained under each function block type gt Enter the circuit diagram up to contact T 014 ofthe timing relay Set the parameters for T 014 274 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N THA BM tli O02 000 IZ 002 000 cn L yeu Go 0 cn PEL PEAN GH Je Function blocks The timing relay works like a flashing relay The EZD symbol for the flashing relay is ll The function is set on the top right beside the number in the parameter display The time base is set to the right of the flashing function Leave the time base set to for seconds gt Move the cursor to the right over the character in order to input the time setpoint value 11 If the same
268. ropean Union Commences last Sunday in March Ends last Sunday in October GB date defined in Great Britain Commences last Sunday in March Ends fourth Sunday in October US date defined in the United States of America Commences first Sunday in April Ends last Sunday in October The following applies to all DST variants Winter time gt Summer time On the day of conversion the clock moves forward one hour at 2 00 to 3 00 Summer time gt Winter time On the day of conversion the clock moves back one hour at 3 00 to 2 00 Select SET CLOCK from the main menu This will open the menu for setting the time gt Select the DST SETTING menu option 368 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Changing between winter summer time DST MONE MANUAL FL GE us SUMMERTIME START OO MM 00 00 SUMMERTIME END OO MM 00 00 _ Selecting DST EZD shows you the options for the DST change The standard setting is NONE for automatic DST changeover Tick at NONE gt Select the required variant and press the OK button Manual selection You want to enter your own date The following applies to EZD devices The time change algorithm always calculates the date from the year 2000 Enter the time change for the year 2000 Proceed to the MANUAL menu and press 2 x OK lt gt Move between the parameters v Change the value OK Sav
269. s Comparison Value of marker Comparison Value of marker range 1 range 1 range 2 range 2 decimal decimal MB15 45 MB65 45 MB16 62 MB66 62 MB17 102 MB67 102 MB18 65 MB68 57 The comparison result of the function block BCO1 is BCO1EQ 0 the data block ranges do not have the same content MB18 and MB68 are not identical Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of a marker range in a different format Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB60 Block 2 at MD80 Each block is 6 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 11 MERI Comparison range 2 I12 MORD Number of bytes NO amp The comparison is in byte format MD80 has 4 bytes Therefore the first two bytes of MD81 are also compared MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 169 Programming wiring E T N Comparison Value of marker Comparison Value of marker range 2 decimal range 1 range 1 range 2 binary decimal binary B60 45 D80 Byte 1 LSB 1097219629 00101101 010000010110011000111110001011 01 B61 62 D80 Byte 2 1097219629 00111110 010000010110011000111110001011 01 B62 102 D80 Byte 3 1097219629 01100110 010000010110011000111110001011 01 B63 65 D80 1097219629 01000001 Byte 4 MSB 010000010110011000111110001011 01 B64 173 D81 15277 10101101 Byte 1 LSB 0011101110101101 B65 59 D81 Byte 2 15277 00111011 0000
270. s PTOIT to PT32T trigger coils Memory requirement of the PUT function block The PUT function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input PUT diagnostics The PUT function block only functions when the EZ NET network is functioning correctly gt Section Signs of life of the individual stations and diagnostics Page 344 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 249 Programming wiring E T N Function of the PUT function block Figure 128 Signal diagram of PUT function block 1 trigger coil 2 trigger coil contact feedback 3 send Pulse width modulation EZD provides 2 pulse width modulation function blocks PW01 and PW02 The function blocks are connected directly to the outputs They are assigned as follows PW01 gt Q1 PW02 gt Q2 When using the pulse width modulation function block with a minimum on time of less than 1s only use devices with transistor outputs The pulse width modulation function block is primarily used for outputting the manipulated variable of a PID controller The maximum frequency is 200 kHz This corresponds to a period duration of 5 ms The maximum period duration is 65 5 s Wiring a pulse width modulation function block A pulse width modulation function block is integrated in the circuit diagram as a contact or coil To prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once o
271. s WxHxD mm 107 5 x 90 x 30 inches 4 23 x 3 54 x 1 18 408 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data Power supply CPU module EZD CP8 Weight g 145 lb 0 32 Mounting Fitted on the fixing shaft of the display or on the top hat rail to DIN 50022 35mm without display or by means of fixing feet without display Inputs outputs EZD R EZD T Dimensions when fitted WxHxD mm 89 x 90 x 25 inches 3 5 x 3 54 x 0 98 Dimensions when removed WxHxD mm 89 x 90 x 44 inches 3 5 x 3 54 x 1 73 Weight EZD R EZD T g 150 140 EZD R EZD T Ib 0 33 0 31 Mounting Snap fitted into the power supply module MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 409 Appendix E T N Dimensions of the EZD 80 display operating unit 22 3 04 a l EZD CP 20 13 7 m e je 30 pe Dimensions of the EZD 80 XM protective membrane amp a 885 z 22 5 a Dimensions of the EZD 80 XS protective cover ee a a i 95 25 410 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data Dimensions of the EZD CP8 power supply CPU module
272. s accepted as a value in M minutes The delay times are the same as described for the constants Example Time base s The operand has the value 9504 The time value is 9 50 s Operand value 45507 The time value is 45 510 s Time base M S The operand has the value 5999 The time value is 99 min 59 s This is the maximum value Time base H M The operand has the value 5999 The time value is 99 h 59 min Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Contacts T 0101 to T 32Q1 260 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Coils e T OLIEN to T 32EN trigger coil TOIRE to T 32RE reset coil T 01ST to T 32ST stop coil Memory requirement of the timing relay The time relay function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Retention Timing relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive timing relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu If a timing relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off IfEZD is started in RUN mode the timing relay operates with the retentively saved actual value The state of the trigger pulse must correspond to the function of the timing relay 1 signal when on delayed
273. s an example of the Visibility tab If14 is closed the value entry element is made invisible The make contact bit logic is set When using break contact bit logic this is the same as a visible circuit Even when invisible the elementis operable and value entry is still possible Set value visible Set value invisible Set value entry Invisible QV via I4 299 1037 Set value entry Invisible QV via I4 299 Figure 170 Making the value entry element invisible For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Screen 6 Screen 6 shows an example of the Operability tab visibility set as in screen 5 When 13 closes the entry function is disabled Make contact bit logic is selected If the value entry element is disabled you can still select it flashing but Entry mode changing values is disabled Ifthe value entry element is in Entry mode when 13 closes the EZD automatically Switches to Selection mode When using break contact bit logic entry is only possible if 13 is actuated The value entry element is made invisible via 14 However itis still operable and values can still be modified 3 not actuated 13 actuated Set value entry disabled Qv via I3 249 1037 Set value entry disabled Qv via I3 249 103 Figure 171 Value entry element disabled MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 317
274. s as follows Yp t Kp x Xs t Xj t Kp Proportional gain X t Setpoint with scan time t Xi t Actual value with scan time t The integral component in the PID controller The integral component Y is proportional to the sum of the control difference over time The equation used by the device for the integral componentis as follows Yi t Kp x TolTn x Xs t Xi t Y t1 Kp Proportional gain Te Scan time Th Integration time also known as reset time Xs t Setpoint with scan time t X t Actual value with scan time t Y t1 Value of the integral component of the manipulated variable with scan time t 1 The differential component in the PID controller The differential componentY p is proportional to the change in the control difference So as to avoid step changes or jumps in the manipulated variable caused by the differential behavior when the setpoint is changed the change of the actual value the process variable is calculated and not the change in the control difference This is shown in the following equation Yp t Kp x TwTc x Xi t1 X t Kp Proportional gain Te Scan time Ty Differential time of the control system also called the rate time 218 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Xi t Actual value with scan time t Xi E1 Actual value with scan time t 1 Scan time Te Scan time T determines the duration
275. s counted 21000 pulses 204 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Behavior when value range is exceeded e The function block sets the switching contact Cl CY to Status 1 The function block retains the value of the last valid operation Counter CI counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact CI CY Switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected Inputs The function block inputs H SL and 54 can have the following operands e Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs 1A01 to IA04 IA01 terminal 17 1A02 terminal 18 A03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 The actual value is only erased in RUN mode with a selective reset signal MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 205 Programming wiring E T N Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Contacts CIO1OF to ClIO20F Actual value Upper setpoint e CIOLFB to Cl02FB Actual value S Lower setpoint CIO1ZE to Cl02ZE Actual value Zero CIOICY to ClO2CY Value range exceeded Coils CIO1EN to CIO2ZEN Counter enable CIOLRE t
276. s data from and to the markers of the remote station Atthe same time the remote Station has read and write access to the same marker range Ensure that both stations do not have write access to the Same markers simultaneously The last write operation will be the one thatis retained Example READ 1MD2 gt 1MD2 WRITE 1MD3 gt 1MD3 The EZD device accesses the markers with station address 1xx These markers correspond to the local markers MD2 and MD3 in the remote station These marker double words contain MD2 MW3 MW4 MB5 MB6 MB7 MB8 M33 to M64 MD3 MW5 MW6 MB9 MB19 MB11 MB12 M65 to M96 The following marker ranges can be selected 1MD1 to 1MD20 This corresponds to the following range in the remote station MD1 to MD20 gt P ress the OK button gt Use the button to select the start of the READ marker range MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 105 Commissioning READ iMDI 1 WRITE iMDOD i Di 4 iMD00 READ MONG WRITE iMDOD 1HD1 4 HOOD PERL iHDii WRITE MOD 1HD1 4 HOOD READ iMD1i WRITE iHD 1MD17 1HD1 4 BAUDRATE MAEI 1E COM LINK i REMOTE MARKER A I COM F FR O2 08 ST E T N gt Use the gt button to enter the upper limit of the READ range gt Use the button to select the value gt Confirm the entry with the OK button gt Use the v butt
277. s first leftmost contact Function If the jump coil is triggered the rungs coming directly after it will not be processed The states of the coils before the jump will be retained unless they are overwritten in rungs that were not missed by the jump J umps are always made forwards i e the jump ends on the first contact with the same number as that of the coil Coil jump when 1 Contact only at the first left hand contact position ump destination The J ump contact point will always be set to 1 Backward jumps are not possible with EZD due to the way it operates If the jump label does not come after the jump coil the jump will be made to the end of the circuit diagram The last rung will also be skipped If a jump destination is not present the jump is made to the end of the circuit diagram Multiple use of the same jump coil and jump contact is possible as long as this is implemented in pairs i e Coil 1 jumped range C ontact 1 Coil 1 jumped range C ontact 1 etc 238 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Attention If rungs are skipped the states of the coils are retained The time value of timing relays that have been started will continue to run Power flow display J umped ranges are indicated by the coils in the power flow display All coils after the jump coil are shown with the symbol of the jump coil Example A selector switch
278. scaling function block Reduce value range Source range Target range o Y1 Y2 Figure 123 Value scaling function block Increase value range Source range Target range Example 1 The source range is a 10 bit value source is the analog input IA01 The target range has 12 bits 236 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N LI I EA rvi KEA ye Gil ITAD i023 4095 Function blocks Parameter display and parameter set for the LS01 function block The actual value at the analog input IA01 is 511 The scaled output value is 2045 Example 2 The source range has 12 bits The target range has 16 signed bits Ii DC01QV PAL 0 AE 4095 Pd 32768 PME 432767 The actual value at the analog input DC01QV 1789 The scaled output value is 4137 Jumps Jumps can be used to optimize the structure of a circuit diagram or to implement the function of a selector switch F or example jumps can be used to implement whether manual automatic mode or different machine programs are to be selected Jumps consist of a jump location and a jump destination label MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 237 Programming wiring E T N Circuit diagram symbols for jumps Contact Make contact Numbers Dito 32 Coils Numbers Dito 32 Coil function tx de Je IPs 1h 1 can only be used a
279. serve the following technical requirements The hole spacing is 30 mm The maximum thickness of the front plate for mounting the power supply CPU module must not be more than 6 mm The maximum thickness of the front plate for mounting an expansion unit with a top hat rail in addition to the power supply CPU module must not be more than 4 mm Leave enough space at the side for the power supply CPU module and if necessary the expansion unit In order to ensure protection to IP 65 the surface of the mounting front must be even and smooth MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 35 Installation E TeN Figure 12 Mounting the display operating unit The protective membrane or the protective cover must be fitted gt Fit the display operating unit in the punched fixing holes 36 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting z JUDO N x Figure 13 Screw fastening the display operating unit Screw fasten the display operating unit The tightening torque must be between 1 2 and 2 Nm 10 6 and 17 6 in lb Ensure that the correct torque is used If the tightening torque is too low or high this may impair the seal BIAS BIS D Y Q IEF ac CIs l D NN QS I gt Dp Figure 14 Mounting the display operating unit front mounting Use the combination
280. sparent in the Display tab MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 297 Visualization with EZD E T N Example program 2 bitmap display with automatic screen change The program is a copy of the program Bitmap BspProg_01 e40 with the difference that the individual screens are displayed automatically in succession The circuit diagram contains a pulse generator T01 that triggers the output Q3 display clock signal and the counter C01 This operation is run in a continuous loop as the counter activates timing relay T02 when its upper limit value SH is reached This resets counter C01 after a set time The counter values activate the corresponding individual screens Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Bitmap_02 Example program 3 overlaying bitmaps The program consists of three screens that you can select via the Cursor buttons and v The screen change is defined in the Button editor gt Section Button editor Page 331 This program illustrates the overlaying of bitmaps ina screen The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LED 3 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Bitmap_03 Screen
281. t The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The make contacts CO1ZE of the counter in the circuit diagram are switched directly before the outputs Q1 to Q4 as well as before LE 3 The outputs are only meant to be active with screen 1 i e when the counter has the value 0 The screens are activated via counter C01 This has the value 2 as the upper setpoint SH thus providing the counter values 0 1 and 2 Counter value 0 activates mask 1 counter value 1 activates the first message text in screen 2 and counter value 2 the second message text in screen 2 When the timing relays T01 to T06 are reset the counter receives a pulse and is incremented by one value If the counter C01 reaches its upper setpoint with the second pass this starts the on delayed timing relay T08 This then resets the counter C01 to 0 after the set time has elapsed 0 8 s This loop is repeated continuously Examples Folder Files can be found onthe EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Message _Text_03 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 325 Visualization with EZD E T N Screen 1 Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine The first screen contains four message text elements These ar
282. t www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Comparison Value of Comparison Value of marker range 2 decimal binary range 1 markerrange range 2 1 decimal binary MB60 45 D80 157935405 00101101 Byte 1 LSB 00101101001011010010110100101101 D80 Byte 2 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 D80 Byte 3 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 D80 757935405 Byte 4 MSB 00101101001011010010110100101101 D81 757935405 Byte 1 LSB 00101101001011010010110100101101 D81 Byte 2 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 D81 Byte 3 757935405 00101100010110110010110100101101 D81 757935 405 Byte 4 MSB 00101101001011010010110100101101 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the value 757935405 is present in the marker double words MD80 and MD81 Example Transfer of marker byte range violation error The value of marker byte MB96 is to be transferred to MD93 MD94 MD95 and MD96 The length is 16 bytes Parameters of BT01 function block Source range Ti MDA Destination range 12 MD44 Number of bytes O 186 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 177 Programming wiring _ E T N The transfer is in byte format MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes 18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length The error message Number of elements exceeds the destination range is output BTOLE1 is 1 Example Transfer of marker bytes
283. t and the basic unit The expansion inputs R1 to R12 R15 R16 are incorrectly processed in the basic unit and show status 0 It cannot be assured that the outputs S1 to S8 are transferred to the expansion unit Warning Continuously monitor the functionality of the EZD expansion in order to prevent switching errors in the machine or plant The status of the internal input 114 of the basic unit indicates the status of the expansion unit e 114 0 expansion unit is functional e 14 1 expansion unit is not functional 396 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Expanding EZD Example Power can be applied to the expansion unit later than the basic unit This means that the basic unit is switched to RUN when the expansion unit is absent The following EZD circuit diagram detects if the expansion unit is functional or not functional I tie H 1 1 i 08 SM Ot I 4 i 08 Ml eo radi Di Figure 195 Circuit diagram for expansion testing As long as 14 is 1 the remaining circuit diagram is skipped If 1 14 is 0 the circuit diagram is processed If the expansion unit drops out for any reason the circuit diagram is skipped M 01 detects whether the circuit diagram was processed for at least one cycle after the power supply is switched on If the circuit diagram is skipped all the outputs reta
284. t for flashing display via Boolean operand I1 Right numerical value Display of timing relay value T08 I1 actuated the numerical value is inverted as the external triggeris set for inverted display via Boolean operand 1 Display 3 37s change I1 external trigger 3 37s Figure 165 External trigger 308 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Left numerical value Screen overview Screen 7 Screen 7 shows a simple example of the display change using an internal limit value comparison The screen shows two numerical values that show the output values QV output of the timing relay T08 The variable type is DWord The timing relay is run ina loop from 0 to 10 seconds A value range from 0 to 11000 is defined in the Number range format tab The unit of measure is set to s seconds The scaling range is defined from 0 to 11 with 2 decimal places The display change is active and is detected via the internal limit value comparison The numerical value display flashes for the left numerical value and is inverted for the right numerical value Table 17 Numerical value analog value output with display change via internal limit value comparison The numerical value flashes in the range from 0 to 3 and from 7 to 10 The upper limit value is set to 7 the display change occurs from numerical value 7 to 10 in the Display change tab and the lower limit value is s
285. t for high speed counters HDi High speed counter function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display 5H Upper setpoint PSL Lower setpoint Poy Defined actual value Preset a Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change setpoint values and or the preset value and the enable of the parameter display Value range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147 483647 Behavior when value range is exceeded The function block sets the switching contact CH CY to status 1 The function block retains the value of the last valid operation Counter CH counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact CH CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected 198 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Inputs The function block inputs H SL and 54 can have the following operands Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs A01 to A04 1A01 terminal 7 1A02 terminal 18 1A03 terminal 111 1A04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 The actual value is only cleared in RUN mode with a specific reset signal Dis
286. tacts AROICY to AR32CY CARRY overflow bit value on function block output greater than or less than the value range ARO1ZE to AR32ZE ZERO zero bit value on function block output is equal to zero Coils The arithmetic function block does not have any coils Memory requirement of the arithmetic function block The arithmetic function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Addition 42 1000 1042 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 163 Programming wiring E T N 2147483647 1 lastvalid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY AR CY Status 1 2048 1000 1048 Subtraction 1134 42 1092 2147483648 3 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY AR CY Status 1 4096 1000 5096 4096 1000 3096 Multiplication 12 x 12 144 1000042 x 2401 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY Correct value 2401100842 AR CY Status 1 1000 x 10 10000 Division 1024 256 4 1024 35 29 the places after the decimal point are omitted 1024 0 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY mathematically correct Infinite AR CY Status 1 1000 10 100 1000 10 100 1000 10 100 10 100 0 164 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N ECET I rIg N
287. tage U Rated operational voltage Us VAC 250 Safe isolation to EN 50178 between coil and contact VAC 300 Safe isolation to EN 50178 between two contacts VAC 300 420 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Technical data EZD R Making capacity IEC 60947 AC 15 250 V AC 3 A 600 Ops h Switch 300000 operations DC 13 L R lt 150 ms 24 V DC 1 A 500 Ops h Switch 200000 operations Breaking capacity IEC 60947 AC 15 250 V AC 3 A 600 Ops h Switch 300000 operations DC 13 L R lt 150 ms 24 V DC 1 A 500 Ops h Switch 200000 operations Filament lamp load 1000 W at 230 240 V AC Switch 25000 operations 500 W at 115 120 V AC Switch 25000 operations Fluorescent tube with ballast 10 x 58 W at230 240VAC Switch 25000 operations Conventional fluorescent tube compensated Switch 25000 1 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC operations Conventional fluorescent tube uncompensated Switch 25000 10 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC operations Operating frequency relays Mechanical switch operations Switch 10 mill 107 operations Mechanical switching frequency Hz 10 Resistive lamp load Hz 2 Inductive load Hz 0 5 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 421 Appendix E T N UL CSA Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC 24 V DC A 10 8 AC Control Circuit Rating Codes utilization category B30
288. tage of 250 V AC on a relay contact Ifthe voltage exceeds this threshold flashover may occur at the contact resulting in damage to the device ora connected load 66 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting transistor outputs Connecting transistor EZD T outputs a ca R H TAN L_e lt N 4 24V 24V 0 5A 0 5A 20 4 28 8 V sway aq CO GA EI Ci CI Ci AY A WY yY y S10A 24V Ovo a 2 y u Figure 50 EZD T transistor outputs EZ6 DC TE OV 24V 24V 0 5A 0 5A 20 4 28 8 V swav Figure 51 EZ6 DC TE transistor outputs MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 67 Installation gt D E T N Parallel connection Up to four outputs can be connected in parallel in order to increase the power The output current will increase in this case to a maximum of 2 A Caution Outputs may only be connected in parallel within a group Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8 1 to 4 or S5 to S8 such as Q1 and Q3 or Q5 Q7 and Q8 Outputs connected in parallel must be switched at the same time Caution Please note the following when switching off inductive loads Suppressed inductive loads cause less interference in the entire electrical system For optimum suppression the Suppressor circuits are best connected directly in the proximity of
289. tches S1 and S2 are atthe input I 01 and I D2 are the contacts for the input terminals Relay K1 is represented by the relay coil D1 The symbol T identifies the coil s function in this case a relay coil acting as a contactor 04 is one of the EZD output relays 88 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Ti 1 E i T i 1 m B 1144 Cif 5 1144 L I i 1 C J 5 1144 Creating your first circuit diagram From the first contact to the output coil With EZD you work from the input to the output The firstinput contactisI H Press OK EZD proposes the first contactI 01 atthe cursor position I flashes and can be changed for example to a F for a pushbutton input using the cursor buttons orv However nothing needs to be changed at this point Press OK 2 x to move the cursor across the 11 to the second contact field You could also move the cursor to the next contact field using the gt cursor button Press OK Again EZD inserts a contact I 01 atthe cursor position Change the contactnumberto I D2 so thatbreak contact S2 can be connected to input terminal 12 gt P ress OK so that the cursor jumps to the next position and press cursor button or v to change the number to D2 You can press DEL to delete a contact at the cursor position Press OK to move the cursor to the third contact field You do
290. tching also retriggerable on and off delayed on and off delayed with random switching single pulse synchronous flashing asynchronous flashing Setcycle time e Value limitation The following applies to function blocks The most recent actual values are cleared if the power Supply is switched off or if EZD is switched to STOP mode Exception Retentive data keeps its state gt Section Retention Page 378 The most recent actual values are transferred to the operands every cycle The data function block is an exception Attention The following applies to RUN mode EZD processes the function block after a pass through the circuit diagram The last state of the coils is used for this If you want to prevent other people from modifying the parameters change the access enable symbol from to when creating the circuit diagram and setting parameters and protect the circuit diagram with a password MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 157 E T N Programming wiring Attention The function blocks are designed so that a function block output can be assigned directly to the input of another function block This enables you always to have an overview of which value is transferred If different data formats are used such as if the first function block uses 32 bits and an 8 bit or 16 bit format is used for further processing sign value errors or value
291. tect the 1 state E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 RI R10 R11 R12 N 115 230 V Figure 36 EZ AC with a diode on the inputs Two wire proximity switches have a residual current with the 0 state If this residual current is too high the EZ input may detect a 1 signal If inputs with a higher input current are required an additional input circuit must be used 56 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs Increasing the input current The following input circuit can be used in order to prevent interference and also when using two wire proximity switches u F N p Fl Ie A o _ 100 nFr275 v T A OY YOQHGHHHH8 8889eag E E RI R2 R3 R4 RS RE R7 R8 R9 RORIRZ L N N 115 230 V Figure 37 Increasing the input current When using a 100 nF capacitor the drop out time of the gt input increases by 80 66 6 ms at 50 60 Hz A resistor can be connected in series with the circuit shown in order to restrict the inrush current A 100 nF 275 V Y OO COOOVOOYPVY GOYOOS E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 RB R9 R10 R11 R12 L N N Lo 115 230 V Figure 38 Limitation of the inrush current with a resistor MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 57 Installation E TeN Complete devices for increasing the input c
292. tely as I O devices regardless of whether they have a display or not You only need to assign the station number This can be implemented via EZS oft or on a Station 1 with a display If you want to assign a device as an intelligent station on the network the REMOTE IO should be deactivated REMOTE 10 Figure 185 Remote lO deactivated 342 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the EZ NET network The standard settings for the input and output devices are SEND 10 f REMOTE RUN lt REMOTE 10 i Station number EZ NET ID and baud rate can be specified via station 1 Station message types The EZ NET network recognizes various message types They are Output data of station 1 Q S which is sent to stations without programs Network outputs and inputs sent and received between stations with programs SN R N Data sent and received via the network between stations with programs PT and GT function blocks Inputs outputs station status R Q S transfers Loading programs to and from every station The EZ NET network is based on a CAN Controller Area Network system Each message type has its own ID The message priority is determined via the respective ID This is important in transmission borderline cases to ensure that all messages reach their destination Transfer behavior Network CPU data transfer to program image Th
293. ter resets itself This therefore produces a continuous loop The language setting for all eight screens is English Examples Folder Files can be found onthe EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Date_and Time_02 Example program 3 different country settings The program consists of 11 screens that can be activated automatically via the counter C01 The pulse signals are generated with timing relay T01 This produces the counter values 0 to 12 Counter value 1 activates screen 1 counter value 2 activates screen 2 etc If upper switch value SH 12 the counter resets itself This therefore produces a continuous loop Each screen contains a different country setting However this same WD DD MM YY formatis shown MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 293 Visualization with EZD E T N Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Date and Time 03 Screen 4 Screen 7 Country Country setting setting Spanish Portuguese MI 01 10 03 QU 01 10 03 Figure 154 Date display with different country settings Bitmap The bitmap mask element makes it possible to display graphics in the EZD display that you have made yourself or have purchased Display and visibility can change during operation To do this you need to associate the bitmap graphics with Boolean variables EZS oft supports the following bitmap graphic formats e Win
294. the operating system 406 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Appendix Technical data General EZD 80 Display operating unit EZD 80 Front dimensions WxHxD With keys mm 86 5 x 86 5 x 21 5 finches 3 41 x 3 41 x 0 85 Without keys mm 86 5 x 86 53 20 inches 3 41 x 3 41 x 0 79 Total dimensions with fixing shaft WxHxD With keys mm 86 5 x 86 5 x 43 inches 3 41 x 3 41 x 1 69 Thickness of fixing wall without intermediate top hat rail minimum maximum mm 1 6 inches 0 04 0 24 Thickness of fixing wall with intermediate top hat rail minimum maximum mm 1 4 inches 0 04 0 16 Weight g 130 Ib 0 287 Mounting 2 22 5 mm 0 886 in holes Display fastened with two fixing rings Maximum tightening torque of the fixing rings Nm 1 2 to2 in lb 10 6 to 17 7 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 407 Appendix E T N Protective membrane EZD XM 80 Dimensions WxHxD mm 88 x 88 x 25 inches 3 46 x 3 46 x 0 98 Weight g 25 lb 0 055 Mounting Is fitted over the display keypad with EZD front ring Protective cover EZD XS 80 Dimensions WxHxD mm 86 5 x 94 x 25 inches 3 41 x 3 41 x 0 98 Weight g 36 lb 0 079 Mounting Is fitted over the display keypad without EZD front ring Power supply CPU module EZD CP8 Dimension
295. tion If the states of the inputs outputs or data are required by a station without fail the respective diagnostics contact should be evaluated and the information applied in accordance with its respective application If the respective diagnostics contacts are not evaluated it may cause faults in your application MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 355 E T N 7 EZD Settings Settings can only be carried outon EZD models provided with buttons and LCD display EZSoftcan be used to set all models via the software Password protection The EZD can be protected by a password against unauthorized access In this case the password consists of a value between 000001 and 999999 The number combination 000000 is used to delete a password Password protection inhibits access to selected areas The System menu is always protected by an activated password The password can protect the following inputs and areas e Start or modification of the program Transfer of a circuit diagram to or from a memory card display operating unit variants Change of the RUN or STOP mode Calling and modification of function block parameters All settings of the real time clock Modifications of all system parameters e Communication with the individual device looping to other devices possible e Switching off the password delete function MN05013005E For more information visit www
296. tion block list with E ZS oft You can then for example use the results consecutively establish contact to the outside world The output relays Q 01 to Q S are switched and the inputs 11 to I R are read once more EZD also copies all the new switching states to the status image register exchange all data on the EZ NET network read and write EZD only uses this status image for one cycle This ensures that each rung is evaluated with the same switching states for one cycle even if the input signals 11 to 112 change their status several times within a cycle The following must be observed when operating a PID controller function block The cycle time of the program must be less than the scan time of the controller If the cycle time is greater than the controller scan time the controller will not be able to achieve constant results 386 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N gt EZD Program cycle COM LINK data access during the program cycle The data exchange with the point to point connection can be carried out in any segment of the program cycle This data exchange increases the cycle time with both active and remote stations Only use data that is absolutely necessary Loading visualization data When setting a program to RUN that contains visualization data the contents of the screens to be displayed have to be loaded The time required for loading in t
297. tion blocks from BV01 to BV32 for Boolean operations with values The following possibilities are provided by the Boolean operation function block Screening out of particular bits from values Bit pattern recognition Bit pattern modification A Boolean operation function block is not wired in the circuit diagram Parameter display and parameter set for Boolean operation function block EY21 Boolean operation function block number 27 AND AND operation mode Appears in the parameter display I First value tli Second value Qy Result of the operation Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block Operating modes ofthe Boolean operation function block Parameter Function AND AND operation OF OR operation OR Exclusive OR operation NOT Negation of the Boolean value of 14 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 183 Programming wiring E T N Value range 32 bit signed value Inputs The function block inputs 11 and I can have the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 IAQ1 terminal 17 1402 terminal 18 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB Analog output QA01 Disp
298. tivation is executed via counter C01 This has the value 1 as the upper setpoint SH The counter values 0 and 1 are therefore used as activation values for the two screens The resetting of timing relays T01 to T06 by T06 activates counter C01 which then reaches the value 1 and therefore has already reached its upper setpoint This then causes screen 2 to be displayed The on delayed timing relay T08 resets counter C01 back to 0 after the settime 0 8 s has elapsed Screen 1 is then displayed again and timing relay T08 is no longer activated This loop is repeated continuously Examples Folder Files can be found on the EZSoftCD ROM in the Examples folder Program Message_Text_02 Screen 1 The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display Screen 2 The second screen contains one message text element with one message text 324 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Example program 3 message text with a display change The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display This program is an extension of the program Message_Text_02 The extension consists of two messages being contained in one message text element in screen 2 which are also toggled automatically A display change is also executed in one message tex
299. tive retentive range When the circuit diagram is deleted via the DELETE PROGRAM menu Transferring retentive behavior The setting for retentive behavior is a circuit diagram setting In other words the setting of the retentive menu may also under certain circumstances be transferred to the memory card or by uploading or downloading from the PC Changing the operating mode or the circuit diagram When the operating mode is changed or the EZD circuit diagram is modified the retentive data is normally saved together with their actual values The actual values of relays no longer being used are also retained Changing the operating mode If you change from RUN to STOP and then back to RUN the actual values of the retentive data will be retained Modifying theEZD circuit diagram If a modification is made to the EZD circuit diagram the actual values will be retained Changing the startup behavior in the SYSTEM menu The retentive actual values are retained in EZD regardless of the setting Modification of the retentive range If the set retentive ranges are reduced only the actual values saved in the range will remain If the retentive range is extended the older data is retained The new data is written with the current actual values in RUN mode MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 381 EZD Settings E T N Displaying device Device information is provided for service tasks and for informati
300. to move one level back OK has two other functions Press OK to save modified settings In the circuit diagram you can also press OK to insert and modify contacts and relay coils In this case EZD must be in STOP mode Press OK 2 x to enter the circuitdiagram display via menu items PROGRAM gt PROGRAM This is where you will create the circuit diagram MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 87 Commissioning 1 Cii E1944 E T N Circuit diagram display The circuit diagram display is currently empty The cursor flashes at the top left which is where you will start to create your diagram The location of the cursor is indicated in the status line L Rung line C Contact or coil contact B Free memory available in bytes Start value 7944 with the first three rungs already generated The EZD circuit diagram supports 4 contacts and one coil in series The EZD display can display 6 circuit diagram contact fields Use the v lt gt cursor buttons to move the cursor over the invisible circuit diagram grid The first four columns are contact fields the fifth column is a coil field Each line is a rung EZD automatically connects the contact to the power supply I Diew I Di f Di L i 0 4 B 1944 Figure 66 Circuit diagram with inputs 11 12 and output Q1 gt Now try to wire up the following EZD diagram Swi
301. trical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs Connecting high speed counters and frequency generators High speed counter signals on the EZD can be counted correctly on inputs 11 to 14 independently of the cycle time LO1 LO2 L01 gt 1A Figure 44 0o00 boo 24V OV OV on Lt High speed counter frequency generator MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 63 Installation E T N Connecting incremental encoders Inputs 11 12 and 13 14 on the EZD can each be used for the high speed counting of an incremental encoder independently of the cycle time The incremental encoder must generate two 24 V DC square wave signals with a 90 phase shift between them LO1 LO2 L01 gt 1A A ooo 0 0 0 0 E oo ooo0o00a nan O 0D Be QO QAO oy Sor 24V OV OV n 12 B 14 15 l6 I7 18 19 110 111 12 Figure 45 Connecting incremental encoders Connecting the outputs The Q outputs function inside EZD as isolated contacts Is de 4 STE 1 2 ag Figure 46 Output Q The respective relay coils are actuated in the EZD circuit diagram via the output relays Q 01 to Q 04 or S 01 to S 06 S 08 You can use the signal states of the output relays as make or break contacts in the EZD circuit diagram for
302. try CRITCeE E EMER DELETE ALL L ACTIVATE Pll CHANGE Ful Change delete password ACTIVATE Pil Le ACTIVATE Pl CHANGE Pil CHANGE Pil PROGRAM lt 4 PROGRAM lt PARAMETERS Le PARAMETERS J TINE TIME OPERATING MODE OPERATING MODE INTERFACE INTERFACE f DELETE FUNCT DELETE FUNCT J MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 23 EZD System menu SECURITY SWSTEM MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR Retention only in STOP mode DEBOUNCE T F BUTTONS J RUN MODE lt CARD MODE J F BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY DISPLAY RETENTION RETENTION INFORMATION INFORMATION DEBOUNCE T F BUTTONS RUM MODE CARO MODE eee MODE CONTRAST LIGHTING i 15 RETENTION INFORMATION DEBOUMCE f F BUTTONS RUM MODE CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY RETENTION INFORMATION DEBOUNCE J F BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY RETENTION IMFORMATION TCR LOO HET e stisi CRO bJibg E T N 24 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation System menu SECURITY ENGLISH SYSTEM DEUTSCH J MENU
303. tual value lt Lower setpoint value e C O1ZE to C 32ZE Actual value zero C OICY to C 32CY Value range exceeded Coils e C 01C_ toC 32C_ counter coils count with rising edge e C 01D_ to C 32D_ count direction definition status 0 count upwards status 1 count downwards e C OIRE to C 32RE Reset actual value to zero e C OISE to C 32SE accept defined actual value with rising edge 188 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Function blocks Memory requirement of the counter relay The counter relay function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu The retentive actual value requires 4 bytes of memory Ifa counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off IfEZD is started in RUN mode the counter relay operates with the retentively saved actual value MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 189 Programming wiring E T N Function of the counter function block 1 PULL e UUI PULL e PULL Figure 101 Signal diagram of counter 1 counter coil C C_ 2 upper setpoint value 5H 3 preset actual value 54 4 lower setpo
304. u option Here you can determine select and modify the data exchange range In the example the READ range was selected with the marker double words MD11 to MD15 The WRITE range consists of the marker double words MD16 to MD18 The entire data exchange range available is the marker range MD01 to MD20 of the remote station The active station accesses these markers with IMD The indicates the number of the marker concerned The smallest possible unit for defining a marker range is an MD marker double word Example The read range of the active station is 1M D02 The write range of the active station is 1M D03 The read range of the remote station is therefore MD03 The write range of the remote station is MD02 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 353 EZ NET Network COM LINK Serial E T N Operating principle of the COM LINK connection The active station at the COM LINK must be in RUN mode Data can only be exchanged with the active station in RUN mode The remote station must be in RUN or STOP mode The active station scans the remote station The entire READ marker range is transferred as a string The entire WRITE marker range is transferred as a string Data consistency The data is located in the image range data range storing the marker states of the active station 1MD as well as in the image range of the remote station MD Each station writes data to its own
305. ual E TeN _ gt Indicates interesting tips and additional information For greater clarity the name of the current chapter is shown in the header of the left hand page and the name of the current section in the header of the right hand page This does not apply to pages at the start of a chapter and empty pages at the end of a chapter 10 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N 1 EZD Target readership EZD must only be installed and wired up by trained electricians or other persons familiar with the installation of electrical equipment A specialist knowledge of electrical engineering is needed for commissioning and creating circuit diagrams When controlling active components such as motors or pressure cylinders parts of the system can be damaged and persons put at risk if EZD is connected or programmed incorrectly Proper use EZD is a programmable device that provides HMI switching closed loop and open loop control functions and can be used to replace relay and contactor controls as well as being used as anEZD device EZD mustbe properly installed before use The display and operating unit of the EZD is protected to IP 65 and does notnormally require any special housing protection The rear EZD units are designed as mounting units and must be installed in an enclosure control cabinet or a service distribution board Both the power feed and the signal terminals must be laid a
306. ue of marker range range destination decimal marker range decimal MB10 123 B20 123 B21 123 B22 123 B23 123 B24 123 B25 123 B26 123 B27 123 B28 123 B29 123 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 atcoilBTO1T_ the value 123 is present in the marker bytes MB20 to MB29 Example Initialization of marker blocks definition of a range with offset The content of marker byte MB15 is to be transferred to marker bytes MB65 to MB68 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 175 Programming wiring E T N Parameters of BT01 function block Source range 21 MBS Destination range I2 B4 Number of bytes MO 4 Marker MBO1 1 Destination range Constant 64 Marker MBO1 plus Offset 1 64 65 gt MB65 Source range Value of source Destination Value of marker range range destination decimal marker range decimal MB15 45 MB65 45 MB66 45 MB67 45 MB68 45 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the value 45 is present in the marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Example Initialization of marker blocks definition of a range in a different format The value of marker byte MB60 is to be transferred to MD80 and MD81 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range Ii MERD Destination range 12 MOED Number of bytes MO amp The transfer is in byte format MD80 has 4 bytes and MD81 has 4 bytes which means that MQ has the value 8 176 For more information visi
307. unarnnionania 335 Automatic change of the RUN and STOP MOG iaeiiai aa 341 GOD Orsi fadescateacesescfivstertertssetcseapraaasttieattsne 48 CADES seinnear 74 Changing the write repetition rate 340 438 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Configuration of the COM LINK wns 352 Configuring input output devices vo 342 Connecting the NET NetWork 71 Data accesses via COM LINK eseeseees 350 Introduction to COM LINK veces 348 Station Message types wees 343 Station signs of life E R 344 TOPOlOQY veces 335 349 Transfer behavior 343 Transmission security scere 347 Network cables 74 Number formats nenssas 133 0 Operating principles eccerre 16 QUtDUE Tela Vice eaaaran 136 OverlOad aoinne 69 393 Monitoring with EZD D T wien 393 PE PHUN Seinen a ne ee 144 Activating and deactivating 371 Parameter display Counter relay 198 204 Timing relay srren 194 Parameters Sie AEn deviate ETE racers Display inhibit access Password Achva HON aiina ana 360 CMANGG ie cccikes tiiccticcascaerderatvaniestasentanas 362 Deleting sesssesesscssssessessssessnssessssssseesssees 362 Protection removal 363 S CUP ieiuna eiiean innia i 358 PaUSC TMG xiditiiicnaiandiutunduimnnas 340 Plug network cable sneer 48 DOING A A A 348 Power failure esssscccrccnsrennierire 84 Power flow display sasescccccncssssn 92 93 145 Progra eain 385 a C E E 385 L000 E E E
308. urrent are available under the type reference EZ256 HCI QQ QOKSOOOVOP OOVYVOS E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 RIO R11 R12 L N N L 115 230 V Figure 39 EZ600 with EZ256 HCI The increased capacitance increases the drop out time by approx 40 ms Connecting EZD DC inputs Use inputterminals 11 to 112 to connect pushbutton actuators switches or 3 or 4 wire proximity switches Given the high residual current do not use 2 wire proximity switches Input signal voltage range e 1 to 16 19 110 OFF signal 0 to5V ON signal 15 V to 28 8 V 17 18 111 112 OFF signal lt 8 V ON signal gt 8 V Input current 1 to 16 19 110 R1 to R12 3 3 mA at 24 V 7 18 111 112 2 2 mA at 24 V 58 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Connecting the inputs L01 LO2 ooo aa Aa nn oO oo rood 1 2 B 4 i5 l6 I7 1819110 111112 Figure 40 EZD DC The digital inputs must have the same voltage as the power supply of the EZD L01 L01 OO COVGCOVO VOY VOVOOS E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 RB RI R10 R11 R12 24V OV OV 24V Figure 41 EZ DC E MN05013005E For more information visit
309. use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram wrt nnn nnn nn nnn nnn nnn nanan a I STHEN Figure 131 EZD circuit diagram with enabling of set cycle time function block Parameter display for set cycle time ZTH sI T1i Setcycle time function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display I Set cycle time The parameter display is used to modify the set cycle time the minimum on time and the enabling of the parameter display Time range Parameter Value and time range Resolution Ti 0 to 1000 ms Inputs The function block input I t can be assigned the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to 1404 1A01 terminal 7 1A02 terminal 18 MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 255 Programming wiring E T N IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 Analog output QA01 Actual value QV gt of another function block Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu e Access enabled Access disabled Coils STOLEN enable coil Memory requirement of the function block The setcycle time function block requires 24 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the set cycle time function block The function block is used to define a fixed cycle time The function block must be enabled so thatit can work Coil STOLEN is active If coil STOLEN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and res
310. utomatic starting in TERMINAL MODE has been deactivated The default setting of the EZD is for the display of the TERMINAL MODE menu i e EZD starts in RUN or STOP mode when the power is switched on Setting LCD contrast and backlight The backlight of the LCD display can be set to one of five stages in order to adapt it to local conditions The display contrast can be set to one of five stages The contrast and backlight settings are implemented as device settings Switch to the System menu IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 376 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Setting LCD contrast and backlight z 7 Select the S STEM menu SECI EiT r Press the OK button MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR Use the v button to selectthe DISPLAY menu and press FUN MODE OK CARO MODE TERMINAL MODE The menus for setting the contrast and backlight are 5 5 rA ee G Press the OK button and move to the contrast entry field Use the and v cursor buttons to set the contrast to a value CONTRAST i between 2 and 42 LIGHTING 15 l gt Select your setting Complete your setting by pressing OK CONTRAST tt i ie aaa LIGHTING 15 The contrast setting will be retained until it is modified Use the cursor buttons
311. utput area If the upper switch value SH 38 is reached the counter resets itself In EZSoft the contents of the marker can be viewed both in decimal and hexadecimal format Only decimal format however is shown in the display Screen 9 Screen 9 shows an example of how to display a value overflow The associated variable is the QV output of timing relay T04 The variable type is DWord The timing relay runs from 0 to 4000 ms A value range from 0 to 3000 and ms as unit of measure are defined in the Number range format tab This causes a value overflow as soon as 3000 ms is exceeded This is indicated in the display by an overflow signal Screen 10 Screen 10 shows an example of how to display a value underflow The associated variable is the QV output of counter C02 The variable type is DWord The counter C02 is triggered by a flashing pulse from timing relay T07 The counter counts down from 12 to 0 A value range from 6 to 12 and mm as unit of measure are defined in the Number range format tab This causes a value underflow as soon as 6 mm is undershot This is indicated in the display by an underflow signal 310 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Value entry This screen element enables you to enter numerical setpoint values on the device during operation and thus make interventions in a process The process value is thus entered via the set variable l
312. ve an active power supply Go to the EZD device that is the active station running the serial interface The following tasks are only possible in STOP mode A SECURITY SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR NET LINK Setting up the COM LINK Caution The EZD device can either run as a station on the EZ NET oras a station ina COM LINK connection Do not switch an EZD device running as an EZ NET station to COM LINK If this is done on EZ NET in RUN mode the entire EZ NET network will be deactivated There will be no further data transfer Solution gt Deactivate the COM LINK Re enter the EZ NET address gt Switch the power supply off and then on again Reconfigure the EZ NET on station 1 gt Simultaneously press the DEL and ALT buttons while EZ shows the Status display The System menu appears Select the CONFIGURATOR menu option Press the OK button Select the COM menu option Press the v button Press the OK button MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 103 Commissioning BAUDRATE IE COM LINK E REMOTE MARKER BAUDRATE 132006 COM LINK REMOTE MARKER _ BAUDRATE 1420 HE COM LINE REMOTE HARKER treed 1920 1E REMOTE MARKER E T N The menu BAUDRATE 96008 will appear The two baud rates are for 9600 or 19200 baud Select the
313. ve membrane before mounting the display operating unit 30 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Mounting Figure 5 Fitting the protective membrane Protective membrane Display operating unit gt Place the protective membrane over the display operating unit Caution Ensure that the membrane fits snugly in the groove of the display operating unit Otherwise a proper seal cannot be guaranteed and particles may enter underneath the membrane This may cause malfunctions in the keypad In food industry applications there is the risk of bacteria building up underneath the membrane MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com 31 Installation E T N Figure 6 Correct position of the protective membrane If the protective membrane has to be replaced the display and the operating unit have to be removed Replace the membrane and refit the device Mounting the protective cover The protective cover is provided for using the device in aggressive environments This protects the display and the operating unit against mechanical damage or destruction Protection to IP65 is maintained The protective cover can be opened so that the operating unit can be used The protective cover can be closed with a sealing facility to provide protection against unauthorized operation Before mounting the display operating unit fit the protect
314. visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Screen overview Number range format tab The Number range format tab is used for defining the following Value range e Unit of measure Scaling range and Input format The display of the value sign can be forced Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Operability tab In the Operability tab select the associated variable for disabling the entry element Example program value entry The program consists of seven screens that can be selected using the Cursor buttons and v The screen change was defined in the Button editor Section Button editor Page 331 When the EZD is in RUN mode you can change values that are processed in the program by using the Cursor buttons lt gt v The EZD shows the actual values in the display In order to change values the EZD must first switch to Selection mode In Selection mode you can select the value entry element containing the values you wish to change Press OK to switch the EZD to Selection mode Use ESC to exit Selection mode The selected value entry element will flash If several value entry elements are present use the Cursor buttons lt gt v to select the required element Screen 7 Press the OK button to move from Selection mode to Entry mode MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 313
315. visit www EatonElectrical com 123 Programming wiring E T N Contact Make contact Break contact Number Page ncremental encoder counter function CI OF CI x OF KeDi 02 203 block upper setpoint value exceeded Overflow ncremental encoder counter function CI FE CI x FE KeDi 02 203 block lower setpoint value undershot Fall below ncremental encoder counter function CI ZE CI x ZE Keli 02 203 block actual value equal to zero ncremental encoder counter function CI x CY CI x CY KeDi 02 203 block actual value has exceeded counter range CARRY Comparator function block CF X LT CF x LT KeDi d2 208 less than Comparator function block CF X EQ CF x Et KeDi dz2 208 equal to Comparator function block CF x GT CF X GT KeDi dz 208 greater than Text output function block DX gi ox of KeDi dz 210 Data function block DE x 4 DE x 4 MEDi d2 2 PID controller value range of IC XLI oC X LI KED1 92 213 manipulated variable exceeded Receive a variable from a station Get GT X G4 oT x Gi KeDi d2 213 Seven day time switch Hil x 4 Hil x 4 MEDi d2 224 Year time switch function block HY x 4 HY x 4 KeDi dz 229 Master reset sets all outputs and MRE OX GH ME x Gi x 01 323 240 markers to zero state Operating hours counter function OT x i OT x a4 x 01 04 247 block set time reached 124 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005
316. write accesses to MD MW MB or M within an MD are made itis the last write operation that is retained This also applies if you are writing markers from a visualization screen 132 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N EZD operation Number formats EZD makes computations with a signed 31 bit value The value range is 2147483648 to 2147 483647 With a 31 bit value the 32nd bit is the sign bit Bit 32 state 0 means a positive number Example 0000 00000000 000000000100 00010010pin 412hex 1042dec Bit 32 1 means a negative number Example 11111111111111111101110010101110 bin FF FF DC AEnex 9042de The marker byte MB and marker word MW number formats are unsigned Circuit diagram display In the EZD circuit diagram contacts and coils of relays are connected up from left to right from the contact to the coil The circuit diagram is created on a hidden wiring grid containing contact fields coil fields and rungs Itis then wired up with connections Insert contacts in the four contact fields The first contact field on the left is automatically connected to the voltage Insertthe relay coil to be controlled together with its function and designation in the coil field The coil designation consists of the coil name coil number and function block from the function designation The coil function defines the method of operation of the coil Every line i
317. xt Ae a display In this display you can use the P buttons to activate P BUTTONS t inputs in your circuit diagram RU iH HODE CARO MODE MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 371 EZD Settings E T N Deactivating the P buttons Select BUTTONS 4 and press OK EZD changes the display to F EUTTONS and the P buttons are deactivated The P buttons are automatically deactivated when loading a circuit diagram from the memory card or via EZS oft to EZD or when deleting a circuit diagram in EZD Startup behavior The startup behavior is an important aid during the commissioning phase The circuit diagram which EZD contains is not as yet fully wired up or the system or machine is in a state which EZD is not permitted to control The outputs should not be controlled when EZD is switched on Setting the startup behavior The EZD devices without a display can only be started in RUN mode Requirement EZD must contain a valid circuit diagram Switch to the System menu IfEZD is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until EZD is unlocked see Section Unlocking EZD from Page 361 Specify the operating mode which EZD must use when the supply voltage is applied Activating RUN mode IfEZD displays RUN MODE 4 this means that EZD will start in Run mode when the supply voltage is applied 372 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN
318. y or switch to TERMINAL MODE The program parameters and the EZD settings are retained in the event of a power failure All you will have to do is reset the real time clock after the back up time has elapsed Circuit diagram entry is only possible in STOP mode Caution In RUN mode the EZD will immediately run the program saved in the unit when the power supply is switched on This will not happen if STOP or TERMINAL mode was set as startup mode In RUN mode outputs are activated according to the switch logic involved The following applies to devices without display operating unit e Memory card containing a valid circuit diagram must be fitted Device must be switched on If the device has no program the program stored on the memory card is loaded automatically and the device immediately starts running the program in RUN mode 84 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E T N Creating your first circuit diagram Creating your first circuit The following single line diagram takes you step by step diagram through wiring up your first circuit diagram In this way you will learn all the rules quickly enabling you to use EZD for your own projects As with conventional wiring you use contacts and relays in the EZD diagram With EZD however you no longer have to connect up components individually At the push of a few buttons the EZD circuit diagram produces all the wiring required All y
319. yed if the value 400 V AC 10 is exceeded and may cause the malfunction of the entire system or machine EZD power supply CPU modules and expansion units can be fed by different DC power supplies 80 For more information visit www EatonE lectrical com MN05013005E E TeN Expanding inputs outputs Remote expansion Remote expansion units can be installed and run up to 30 m away from the basic unit Warning The two wire or multiple wire cable between the devices must adhere to the insulation voltage requirement which is Stipulated for the installation environment Otherwise a fault ground fault short circuit may lead to the destruction of the units or injury to persons A cable such as NYM 0 with a rated operational voltage of Ue 300 500 V AC is normally sufficient EZ6 RE TE Up 300 500 V Figure 63 Connecting remote expansion units to the EZD Terminals E and E of the EZ200 EZ are protected against short circuits and polarity reversal Functionality is only ensured if E is connected with E and E with E MN05013005E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 81 E T N 3 Commissioning Switching on Before startup check whether the power supply inputs outputs the serial interface and the EZ NET connection are properly connected 24V DC version Terminal 24 V 24

EZD Series

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents